LG LD550 32LD550, 42LD550, 46LD550, 52LD550, 60LD550, LD650 47LD650, 55LD650, LE5400 32LE5400, 42LE5400, 47LE5400, 55LE5400, LE5500 42LE5500, 47LE5500, 55LE5500, LE5350 42LE5350, 47LE5350, LE7500 42LE7500, 47LE7500, 55LE7500, LE8500 47LE8500 OWNER'S MANUAL

OWNER’S MANUAL
LED LCD TV / LCD TV
PLASMA TV
Please read this manual carefully before operating
your set and retain it for future reference.
LCD TV MODELS
32LD550 47LD650
42LD550 55LD650
46LD550
52LD550
60LD550
LED LCD TV MODELS
42LE5500
32LE5400
47LE5500
42LE5400
55LE5500
47LE5400
42LE7500
55LE5400
47LE7500
42LE5350
55LE7500
47LE5350
P/NO : SAC34134203 (1006-REV07)
47LE8500
55LE8500
42LX6500
47LX6500
55LX6500
PLASMA TV MODELS
50PK750
60PK750
www.lg.com
WARNING / CAUTION
WARNING / CAUTION
To prevent fire or shock hazards, do not expose
this product to rain or moisture.
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC
SHOCK DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR
BACK). NO USER SERVICEABLE PARTS
INSIDE. REFER TO QUALIFIED SERVICE
PERSONNEL.
The lightning flash with arrowhead
symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to
the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to
constitute a risk of electric shock to persons.
The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert
the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the
appliance.
WARNING/CAUTION
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE AND
ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS
PRODUCT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.
NOTE TO CABLE/TV INSTALLER
This reminder is provided to call the CATV system
installer’s attention to Article 820-40 of the National
Electric Code (U.S.A.). The code provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be connected to the
grounding system of the building, as close to the
point of the cable entry as practical.
2
FCC Notice
Class B digital device
This equipment has been tested and found to
comply with the limits for a Class B digital device,
pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These
limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses
and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not
installed and used in accordance with the
instructions, may cause harmful interference to
radio communications. However, there is no
guarantee that interference will not occur in a
particular installation. If this equipment does
cause harmful interference to radio or television
reception, which can be determined by turning
the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or
more of the following measures:
- Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
- Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
- Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit
different from that to which the receiver is connected.
- Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV
technician for help.
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause (harmful)
interference, and (2) this device must accept
any interference received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation (of the
device).
Any changes or modifications in construction of
this device which are not expressly approved by
the party responsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
CAUTION
Do not attempt to modify this product in any
way without written authorization from LG
Electronics.
Unauthorized modification could void the user’s
authority to operate this product.
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
Read these instructions.
Keep these instructions.
6
Protect the power cord from being walked
on or pinched particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where
they exit from the apparatus.
7
Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer.
8
Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket,
or table specified by the manufacturer, or
sold with the apparatus. When a cart is
used, use caution when moving the cart/
apparatus combination to avoid injury from
tip-over.
9
Unplug this apparatus during lighting
storms or when unused for long periods
of time.
10
Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is required when the
apparatus has been damaged in any way,
such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects
have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture,
does not operate normally, or has been
dropped.
Heed all warnings.
Follow all instructions.
1
2
Do not use this apparatus near water.
Clean only with dry cloth.
3
Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in
accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
4
Do not install near any heat sources such as
radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce heat.
5
Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized
or grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has
two blades with one wider than the other. A
grounding type plug has two blades and a third
grounding prong, The wide blade or the third
prong are provided for your safety. If the provided
plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet.
3
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
4
11
Never touch this apparatus or antenna during
a thunder or lighting storm.
12
When mounting a TV on the wall, make sure
not to install the TV by the hanging power
and signal cables on the back of the TV.
13
Do not allow an impact shock or any objects
to fall into the product, and do not drop onto
the screen with something.
14
CAUTION concerning the Power Cord:
It is recommend that appliances be placed
upon a dedicated circuit; that is, a single
outlet circuit which powers only that appliance and has no additional outlets or
branch circuits. Check the specification page
of this owner's manual to be certain.
Do not connect too many appliances to the
same AC power outlet as this could result in
fire or electric shock.
Do not overload wall outlets. Overloaded wall
outlets, loose or damaged wall outlets, extension cords, frayed power cords, or damaged
or cracked wire insulation are dangerous . Any
of these conditions could result in electric
shock or fire. Periodically examine the cord of
your appliance, and if its appearance indicates
damage or deterioration, unplug it, discontinue use of the appliance, and have the cord
replaced with an exact replacement part by
an authorized servicer. Protect the power cord
from physical or mechanical abuse, such as
being twisted, kinked, pinched, closed in a
door, or walked upon. Pay particular attention
to plugs, wall outlets, and the point where the
cord exits the appliance.
Do not use a damaged or loose power cord.
Do not pull on the power cord to unplug the
TV. Grasp the plug when unplugging the
power cord.
15
WARNING - To reduce the risk of fire or electrical shock, do not expose this product to
rain, moisture or other liquids. Do not touch
the TV with wet hands. Do not install this
product near flammable objects such as
gasoline or candles or expose the TV to
direct air conditioning.
16
Do not expose to dripping or splashing and
do not place objects filled with liquids, such
as vases, cups, etc. on or over the apparatus (e.g. on shelves above the unit).
17
GROUNDING
Ensure that you connect the earth ground
wire to prevent possible electric shock (i.e. a
TV with a three-prong grounded AC plug
must be connected to a three-prong grounded AC outlet). If grounding methods are not
possible, have a qualified electrician install a
separate circuit breaker.
Do not try to ground the unit by connecting it
to telephone wires, lightening rods, or gas
pipes.
Power
Supply
Short-circuit
Breaker
18
DISCONNECTING DEVICE FROM MAINS
Mains plug is the disconnecting device. The
plug must remain readily operable.
19
As long as this unit is connected to the AC
wall outlet, it is not disconnected from AC
power even if you turn off the power switch
on the unit.
20
ANTENNAS
Outdoor antenna grounding
If an outdoor antenna is installed, follow the
precautions below. An outdoor antenna system should not be located in the vicinity of
overhead power lines or other electric light or
power circuits, or where it can come in contact
with such power lines or circuits as death or
serious injury can occur.
Be sure the antenna system is grounded so as
to provide some protection against voltage
surges and built-up static charges.
Section 810 of the National Electrical Code
(NEC) in the U.S.A. provides information with
respect to proper grounding of the mast and
supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in
wire to an antenna discharge unit, size of
grounding conductors, location of antenna
discharge unit, connection to grounding electrodes and requirements for the grounding
electrode.
23
Ventilation
Install your TV where there is proper ventilation. Do not install in a confined space such
as a bookcase. Do not cover the product
with cloth or other materials (e.g.) plastic
while plugged in. Do not install in excessively dusty places.
24
Take care not to touch the ventilation openings. When watching the TV for a long
period, the ventilation openings may
become hot.
25
If you smell smoke or other odors coming
from the TV or hear strange sounds, unplug
the power cord contact an authorized service
center.
26
Do not press strongly upon the panel with
hand or sharp object such as nail, pencil or
pen, or make a scratch on it.
27
Keep the product away from direct sunlight.
28
For LED LCD TV/LCD TV
If the TV feels cold to the touch, there may be
a small “flicker” when it is turned on. This is
normal, there is nothing wrong with TV.
Some minute dot defects may be visible on
the screen, appearing as tiny red, green, or
blue spots. However, they have no adverse
effect on the monitor's performance.
Avoid touching the LCD screen or holding
your finger(s) against it for long periods of
time. Doing so may produce some temporary distortion effects on the screen.
Antenna grounding according to the National
Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70
Ground Clamp
Antenna Lead in Wire
Antenna Discharge Unit
(NEC Section 810-20)
Electric Service
Equipment
Grounding Conductor
(NEC Section 810-21)
Ground Clamps
Power Service Grounding
Electrode System (NEC
Art 250, Part H)
NEC: National Electrical Code
21
22
Cleaning
When cleaning, unplug the power cord and
rub gently with a soft cloth to prevent
scratching. Do not spray water or other liquids
directly on the TV as electric shock may occur.
Do not clean with chemicals such as alcohol,
thinners or benzene.
Moving
Make sure the product is turned off, unplugged
and all cables have been removed. It may take
2 or more people to carry larger TVs. Do not
press against or put stress on the front panel
of the TV.
ON DISPOSAL
(Only Hg lamp used LCD TV)
The fluorescent lamp used in this product contains a small amount of mercury. Do not
dispose of this product with general household waste. Disposal of this product must be
carried out in accordance to the regulations of
your local authority.
5
29
6
Viewing 3D Imaging (For 3D TV)
ŹWhen viewing 3D imaging, watch the
TV from an effective viewing angle and
within the appropriate distance. If you exceed this viewing angle or distance, you
may not be able to view the 3D imaging.
Furthermore, the 3D imaging may not
display if it is viewed while you are lying
down.
ŹIf you watch the 3D imaging too closely
or for a long period of time, it may harm
your eyesight.
ŹWatching the TV or playing video games
that incorporate 3D imaging with the
3D glasses for a long period of time can
cause drowsiness, headaches or fatigue
to you and/or your eyes. If you have a
headache, or otherwise feel fatigued or
drowsy, stop watching the TV and take a
rest.
ŹPregnant woman, seniors, persons with
heart problems or persons who experience frequent drowsiness should refrain
from watching 3D TV.
ŹSome 3D imaging may cause you to duck
or dodge the image displayed in the video.
Therefore, it is best if you do not watch 3D
TV near fragile objects or near any objects
that can be knocked over easily.
Ź Please prevent children under the age of
5 from watching 3D TV. It may affect their
vision development.
ŹWarning for photosensitization seizure:
Some viewers may experience a seizure
or epilepsy when exposed to certain factors, including flashing lights or images in
TV or video games. If you or anybody from
your family has a history of epilepsy or seizure, please consult with your doctor before
watching 3D TV.
Also certain symptoms can occur in unspecified conditions without any previous
history. If you experience any of the following symptoms, immediately stop watching
the 3D imaging and consult a doctor: dizziness or lightheadedness, visual transition or
altered vision, visual or facial instability, such
as eye or muscle twitching, unconscious action, convulsion, loss of conscience, confusion or disorientation, loss of directional
sense, cramps, or nausea. Parents should
monitor their children, including teenagers,
for these symptoms as they may be more
sensitive to the effects of watching 3D TV.
Risk of photosensitization seizure can be reduced with the following actions.
- Take frequent breaks from watching 3D TV.
- For those who have vision that is different
in each eye, they should watch the TV after taking vision correction measures.
- Watch the TV so that your eyes are on the
same level as the 3D screen and refrain
from sitting too closely to the TV
- Do not watch the 3D imaging when tired or
sick, and avoid watching the 3D imaging
for a long period of time.
- Do not wear the 3D glasses for any other
purpose than viewing 3D imaging on a 3D
TV.
- Some viewers may feel disoriented after
watching 3D TV. Therefore, after you watch
3D TV, take a moment to regain awareness of
your situation before moving.
CONTENTS
WARNING / CAUTION ............................2
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS ........................3
CONTENTS ......................................................6
FEATURE OF THIS TV ..............................9
PREPARATION
Accessories ...........................................................10
Optional Extras ..................................................... 11
Front Panel Information .................................... 12
Back Panel Information ..................................... 17
Stand Instructions .....................................................20
VESA Wall Mounting ........................................26
Cable Management ..........................................28
Desktop Pedestal Installation .......................... 31
Swivel Stand ......................................................... 31
Attaching the TV to a Desk ............................32
Kensington Security System ..........................32
Securing the TV to the wall to prevent falling
when the tv is used on a stand .....................33
Antenna or Cable Connection .......................34
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
HD Receiver Setup ............................................35
DVD SETUP .........................................................39
VCR SETUP .........................................................42
Other A/V Source Setup .................................44
USB Connection ................................................45
Headphone Setup ....................................................46
Audio Out Connection ..................................... 47
External Equipment WIreless Connection
(Optional Extras) .................................................48
PC Setup ..............................................................49
Network Setup ....................................................55
WATCHING TV / CHANNEL CONTROL
Remote Control Functions ..............................63
Turning on the TV ..............................................66
Channel Selection..............................................66
Volume Adjustment ..........................................66
Initial Setting ....................................................... 67
On-Screen Menus Selection .......................... 69
Quick Menu .......................................................... 71
Customer Support
- Software Update ............................................. 72
- Picture Test/Sound Test................................ 73
- Product/Service Info. ..................................... 74
- Network Test ..................................................... 74
Simple Manual .................................................... 75
Channel Setup
- Auto Scan (Auto Tuning).............................. 76
- Add/Delete Channel (Manual Tuning) ..... 77
- Channel Editing ............................................... 78
Favorite Channel Setup .................................... 79
Favorite Channel List ........................................ 79
Channel List ....................................................... 80
Channel Information .......................................... 81
Channel Brief Information ...............................82
Input List ..............................................................83
Input Label...........................................................84
Reset to Factory Default (Initial Setting) .....85
Mode Setting ......................................................86
Demo Mode ........................................................ 87
AV Mode ...............................................................88
Game .....................................................................89
SIMPLINK.............................................................90
3D VIDEO
3D Video...............................................................92
MY MEDIA
Entry Mode ..........................................................96
Connection Method .......................................... 97
Movie list............................................................. 102
Photo list............................................................. 109
Music list.............................................................. 115
DivX Registration Code .................................. 120
Deactivation ........................................................ 121
NETWORK
Legal Notice ...................................................... 122
7
NETCAST
Netcast Menu.................................................... 123
YOUTUBE........................................................... 124
PICASA ............................................................... 126
PICTURE CONTROL
Picture Size (Aspect Ratio) Control............ 128
Picture Wizard ................................................... 130
ᰚEnergy Saving ............................................ 132
Preset Picture Settings (Picture Mode) ..... 133
Manual Picture Adjustment - User Mode 134
Picture Improvement Technology (Advanced
Control) ............................................................... 135
Expert Picture control ..................................... 136
Picture Reset ..................................................... 139
TruMotion ......................................................... 140
LED Local Dimming ........................................141
Power Indicator ................................................ 142
Image Sticking Minimization (ISM) Method . 143
SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL
Auto Volume...................................................... 144
Clear Voice II ..................................................... 145
Balance ............................................................... 146
Preset Sound Settings (Sound Mode) .......147
Sound Setting Adjustment - User Mode . 148
Audio Reset ....................................................... 149
TV Speakers On/Off Setup .......................... 150
Stereo/SAP Broadcast Setup ....................... 151
Audio Language ............................................. 152
On-screen Menus Language Selection .... 153
Caption Mode
- Analog Broadcasting System Captions . 154
- Digital Broadcasting System Captions ... 155
- Caption Option .............................................. 156
8
TIME SETTING
Clock Setting
- Auto Clock Setup ..........................................157
- Manual Clock Setup .................................... 158
Auto On/Off Time Setting ............................ 159
Sleep Timer Setting ........................................ 160
PARENTAL CONTROL / RATINGS
Set Password & Lock System
- Setting up Your Password ............................161
- Set Password ................................................. 162
- Lock System................................................... 163
Channel Blocking ............................................. 164
Movie & TV Rating .......................................... 165
Downloadable Rating .......................................170
External Input Blocking ....................................171
Key Lock ..............................................................172
APPENDIX
Troubleshooting .................................................173
Maintenance .......................................................176
Product Specifications ....................................177
IR Codes ............................................................. 182
External Control Through RS-232C .......... 184
Open Source License ..................................... 190
FEATURE OF THIS TV
ᯫ
Some of these features are not available on all models.
High-definition
television.
Highresolution digital television broadcast
and playback system composed of
roughly a million or more pixels, 16:9
aspect-ratio screens, and AC3 digital
audio. A subset of digital television,
HDTV formats include 1080p, 1080i,
and 720p resolutions.
Manufactured under license from Dolby
Laboratories. “Dolby “and the double-D
symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories.
HDMI, the HDMI logo and HighDefinition Multimedia Interface are
trademarks or registered trademarks of
HDMI Licensing LLC."
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO: DivX® is a digital
video format created by DivX,Inc. This is
an official DivX Certified device that
plays DivX video. Visit www.divx.com for
more information and software tools to
convert your files into DivX video.
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND:
This DivX Certified® device must be
registered in order to play DivX Videoon-Demand (VOD) content. To generate the registration code, locate the
DivX VOD section in the device setup
menu. Go to vod.divx.com with this
code to complete the registration process and learn more about DivX VOD.
“DivX Certified to play DivX video up to
HD 1080p, including premium content”
This TV contains the detailed calibrations necessary for professional certification by the Imaging Science
Foundation. The resulting ISF “day” and
“night” modes will then be accessible
by the user to experience the best their
LG HDTV has to offer.
Sophisticated and detailed calibrations
can be made through the ISFccc mode.
Detailed calibration requires a licensed
technician.
Please contact your local dealer to
inquire about an ISF certified technician.
THX (Thomlinson Holman’s Experiment)
is an audio and video certification standard established by George Lucas and
Thomlinson. A THX certified display
guarantees screen quality that exceeds
the display standard specification in
both hardware and software.
View videos and photos and listen to
music on your TV through USB 2.0
(‘videos’ dependent on model).
Displays HDTV programs in full 1920 x
1080p resolution for a more detailed
picture.
“Pat. 7,295,673; 7,460,688;7,519,274”
IMPORTANT INFORMATION TO PREVENT “IMAGE
BURN / BURN-IN” ON YOUR TV SCREEN
ᯫ
ᯫ
ᯫ
When a fixed image (e.g. logos, screen menus, video game, and computer display) is displayed
on the TV for an extended period, it can become permanently imprinted on the screen. This
phenomenon is known as “image burn” or “burn-in.” Image burn is not covered under the manufacturer’s warranty.
In order to prevent image burn, avoid displaying a fixed image on your TV screen for a prolonged
period (2 or more hours for LCD, 1 or more
hours for Plasma).
Image burn can also occur on the letterboxed areas of your TV if you use the 4:3
aspect ratio setting for an extended period.
9
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
ACCESSORIES
PREPARATION
Ensure that the following accessories are included with your TV. If an accessory is missing, please contact the dealer where you purchased the TV.
The accessories included may differ from the images below.
1.5V 1.5V
Owner’s Manual
CD Manual,
Nero MediaHome 4
Essentials CD
Remote Control,
Batteries (AAA)
Option Extras
Not included with all models
* Wipe spots on the exterior only with the
polishing cloth.
Polishing Cloth
* Do not wipe roughly when removing
stains. Excessive pressure may cause
scratches or discoloration.
D-sub 15 pin Cable
When using the VGA (D-sub 15
pin cable) PC connection, the user
must use shielded signal interface
cables with ferrite cores to maintain standards compliance.
Not included with all models
Ferrite core can be used to reduce the electromagnetic
waves that may interfere with the TV. Install the Ferrite
core on the power cable close to the wall plug.
Close to the wall plug.
Ferrite Core
(Black)
Ferrite Core
(White)
Ferrite core can be used to reduce the electromagnetic
wave when connecting the LAN cable. Place the ferrite
core far from TV and wind the LAN cable in the ferrite
core once.
Plasma TV
(For 50PK750)
x3
(M5 x 14)
x4
(M4 x 28)
Screws for stand assembly
(Refer to P.20)
10
x2
Cable Holder
(Refer to p.28)
Protection Cover
(Refer to p.21)
Power Cord
32/42/46/52/60LD550, 47/55LD650
PREPARATION
(For 32/42LD550)
x8
(M4 x 20)
Screws for stand assembly
(Refer to P.22)
Protection Cover
(Refer to P.23)
Screw for stand fixing
(Refer to P.32)
Power Cord
42/47LE5350, 32/42/47/55LE5400, 42/47/55LE5500, 42/47/55LE7500, 47/55LE8500, 42/47/55LX6500
(47/55LE8500)
(55LE5400/5500/7500,
55LX6500, 42LE5350)
x8
(M4 x 20)
x4
(47LE5350)
x4
(M4 x 24) (M4 x 16)
x4
(Other models)
x4
x8
(M4 x 26) (M4 x 16)
(M4 x 16)
Cable Holder
(Refer to p.30)
Screws for stand assembly (Refer to P.24)
x2
(For 42/47/55LE7500)
(For 42/47/55LE7500,
47/55LE8500)
PO
W
VO
ER
TV
L
/IN
Component gender cable,
AV gender cable
PU
T
CH
(For 32LE5400)
FLAS
HBK
1.5V 1.5V
Simple Remote Control,
Batteries (AAA)
Screw for stand fixing
(Refer to P.32)
Cleansing Cloths
(mitt)
* Wipe spots on the exterior only with the cleasing cloths.
* Do not wipe roughly when removing stains. Excessive pressure may cause scratches or discoloration.
* For cleaning front frame, please slowly wipe in one direction
after spraying water 1-2 times on cleansing cloths. Please
remove excessive moisture after cleaning. Excessive moisture may cause water stains on the frame.
OPTIONAL EXTRAS
Optional extras can be changed or modified for quality improvement without any notification.
Contact your dealer for buying these items.
This device only works with compatible LG LED LCD TV, LCD TV, or Plasma TV.
(Except 42/47LE5350)
Wireless Media Box
(AN-WL100W)
(Except 42/47LE5350)
Wireless LAN for Broadband/
DLNA Adaptor
(AN-WF100)
(For 42/47/55LX6500)
3D Glasses
(AG-S100)
11
PREPARATION
FRONT PANEL INFORMATION
PREPARATION
ᯫ
Image shown may differ from your TV.
50/6OK750
Remote Control Sensor
Power/Standby Indicator
Illuminates red in standby mode.
SPEAKER
Intelligent Sensor
Adjusts picture according to the
surrounding conditions
Touch Button
You can operate the button just by touching the button lightly with your finger.
INPUT
MENU
ENTER
POWER INPUT MENU ENTER
Button Button Button Button
12
VOL
VOLUME
(-, +)
Buttons
CH
CHANNEL
(ᰝ, ᰜ)
Buttons
PREPARATION
32/42/46/52/60LD550
CHANNEL
(ᰜ,ᰝ) Buttons
CH
VOLUME (+, -)
Buttons
VOL
ENTER Button
SPEAKER
ENTER
Power/Standby Indicator
(Can be adjusted using the Power Indicator
in the OPTION menu.Źp.142)
MENU Button
MENU
INPUT Button
INPUT
POWER Button
Remote Control Sensor
Intelligent Sensor
Adjusts picture according to the
surrounding conditions
13
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
ᯫ
Image shown may differ from your TV.
47/55LD650
CH
VOL
CHANNEL
(ᰜ,ᰝ) Buttons
VOLUME (+, -)
Buttons
ENTER
ENTER Button
MENU
MENU Button
INPUT
SPEAKER
INPUT Button
POWER Button
Power/Standby Indicator
(Can be adjusted using the Power Indicator
in the OPTION menu.Źp.142)
Remote Control Sensor
Intelligent Sensor
Adjusts picture according to the surrounding conditions
14
PREPARATION
42/47LE5350, 32/42/47/55LE5400, 42/47/55LE5500, 42/47/55LE7500, 42/47/55LX6500
Remote Control Sensor
Intelligent Sensor
Adjusts picture according to
the surrounding conditions
Power/Standby Indicator
(Can be adjusted using the Power Indicator in
the OPTION menu.Źp.142)
SPEAKER
Emitter
(For 42/47/55LX6500)
It is the part equipped with
the emitter exchanging
signal with 3D glasses.
Please be careful not to
block the screen with
objects or people while
watching a 3D Video.
Touch Button
You can operate the button just by touching the button lightly with your finger.
CH
VOL
CHANNEL VOLUME
(-, +)
(ᰝ,ᰜ)
Buttons
Buttons
ENTER
MENU
INPUT
ENTER MENU INPUT POWER
Button Button Button Button
15
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
ᯫ
Image shown may differ from your TV.
47/55LE8500
Remote Control Sensor
Intelligent Sensor
Adjusts picture according to
the surrounding conditions
SPEAKER
Touch Button
You can operate the button just by touching the button lightly with your finger.
CH
CHANNEL
(ᰝ,ᰜ)
Buttons
16
VOL
VOLUME
(-, +)
Buttons
ENTER
MENU
INPUT
ENTER MENU INPUT POWER
Button Button Button Button
Power/Standby Indicator
(Can be adjusted using the
Power Indicator in the
OPTION menu.Źp.142)
BACK PANEL INFORMATION
Image shown may differ from your TV.
PREPARATION
ᯫ
50/60PK750
USB IN 2
12
SERVICE ONLY
9
2
3
5
4
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
RS-232C IN
RGB IN (PC)
(CONTROL & SERVICE)
DVI IN 4
2
2
1
/DVI IN
REMOTE CONTROL IN
AV IN 1
VIDEO L(MONO) AUDIO R
3
6
VIDEO L(MONO) AUDIO R
WIRELESS
CONTROL
COMPONENT IN
LAN
AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI)
1
10
USB IN 1
or
2
Y
L
PR
PB
ANTENNA
/CABLE
IN
R
1
AUDIO
VIDEO
6
AV IN 2
13
8
7
32/42/46/52/60LD550, 47/55LD650
AC IN
USB IN 2
12
CABLE MANAGEMENT
3
4
RGB IN (PC)
LAN
2
RGB/DVI OPTICAL DIGITAL
5
VIDEO L(MONO) AUDIO R
AUDIO IN AUDIO OUT
2
/DVI IN
Y
PB
PR
L
R
1
AUDIO
VIDEO
AV IN 1 COMPONENT IN
1
WIRELESS
CONTROL
(SERVICE ONLY)
3
2
ꔡ
RS-232C IN
IN 4
2
6
ANTENNA/
CABLE IN
VIDEO L/MONO AUDIO R H/P
1
USB IN 1
10
11
6
AV IN 2
9
8
7
17
PREPARATION
42/47LE5350, 32/42/47/55LE5400, 42/47/55LE5500, 42/47/55LE7500, 47/55LE8500, 42/47/55LX6500
PREPARATION
USB IN 2
12
2
3
4
RGB IN (PC)
(CONTROL&SERVICE)
RS-232C IN
COMPONENT IN3
AUDIO / Y PB PR
1
8
/DVI IN
3
5
2
AUDIO IN
1
AUDIO OUT
2
Y
PB
PR
L
R
1
AUDIO
VIDEO
11
6
2
7
32/42/47/55LE5400, 42/47/55LE5500, 42/47/55LE7500,
47/55LE8500
2
3
4
RS-232C IN
RGB IN (PC)
(SERVICE ONLY)
/DVI IN
LAN
3
VIDEO L(MONO) AUDIO R
1
AUDIO OUT
2
WIRELESS
CONTROL
Y
PB
PR
L
R
1
AUDIO
VIDEO
AV IN 1 COMPONENT IN
ꔡ
CAUTION
For HDMI IN 4 and USB IN 1, 2
Ź For an optimal connection,
HDMI cables and USB
devices should have bezels
less than 10 mm (0.39
inches) thick.
5
(RGB/DVI) OPTICAL DIGITAL
2
AUDIO IN
6
ANTENNA/
CABLE IN
*A
9
8
7
42/47/55LX6500
1
2
3
4
RGB IN (PC)
RS-232C IN
(CONTROL&SERVICE)
/DVI IN
LAN
3
2
ꔡ
1
WIRELESS
CONTROL
5
VIDEO L(MONO) AUDIO R
AUDIO OUT
2
Y
PB
PR
L
R
1
AUDIO
VIDEO
18
9
8
AV IN 1 COMPONENT IN
(RGB/DVI) OPTICAL DIGITAL
AUDIO IN
6
ANTENNA/
CABLE IN
8
1
H/P
VIDEO L(MONO) AUDIO R
AV IN 1 COMPONENT IN
(RGB/DVI) OPTICAL DIGITAL
IN 4
LAN
AV IN2
VIDEO / AUDIO
USB IN 1
10
42/47LE5350
6
ANTENNA/
CABLE IN
7
10 mm (0.39 inches)
PREPARATION
1
2
3
4
5
6
LAN
Network connection for Netflix, Yahoo! TV
Widgets, etc (for USA).
Also used for video, photo and music files on
a local network.
HDMI/DVI IN, HDMI IN
Digital Connection.
Supports HD video and Digital audio. Doesn’t
support 480i.
Accepts DVI video using an adapter or HDMI
to DVI cable (not included).
RGB IN (PC)
Analog PC Connection. Uses a D-sub 15 pin
cable (VGA cable).
AUDIO IN (RGB/DVI)
0.32 cm (1/8 inch) headphone jack for analog
PC audio input.
RS-232C IN (CONTROL & SERVICE),
SERVICE ONLY, or RS-232C IN (SERVICE
ONLY)
Used by third party devices.
This port is used for service or Hotel mode.
OPTICAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
Digital optical audio output for use with amps
and home theater systems.
Note: In standby mode, this port doesn’t work.
7
ANTENNA/CABLE IN
Connect over-the-air or cable signals to this
jack.
8
COMPONENT IN
Analog Connection.
Supports HD.
Uses a red, green, and blue cable for video &
red and white for audio.
9
WIRELESS CONTROL
Connect the Wireless Ready Dongle to the TV
to control the external input devices connected to Media Box wirelessly.
10
USB INPUT
Used for viewing photos, watching movies
and listening to MP3s.
11
HEADPHONE
0.32 cm (1/8 inch) headphone jack
Impedance 16 Ω , Maximum audio out 15 mW
12
Power Cord or Socket
For operation with AC power.
Caution: Never attempt to operate the TV on
DC power.
13
REMOTE CONTROL IN
For a wired remote control.
AV (Audio/Video) IN
Analog composite connection. Supports
standard definition video only (480i).
19
PREPARATION
STAND INSTRUCTIONS (For 50/60PK750)
PREPARATION
ᯫ
Image shown may differ from your TV.
INSTALLATION (For 50PK750)
1
Carefully place the TV screen side down on
a cushioned surface to protect the screen
from damage.
STAND BODY
2
Assemble the parts of the STAND BODY
with the STAND BASE of the TV.
M5 x 14
3
Assemble the TV as shown.
4
Install the 4 screws into the holes shown.
! NOTE
Ź When assembling the desk type stand,
make sure the screws are fully tightened (If
not tightened fully, the TV can tilt forward
after the product installation). Do not over
tighten.
20
M4 x 28
STAND BASE
PREPARATION
DETACHMENT
1
Carefully place the TV screen side down on
a cushioned surface to protect the screen
from damage.
50PK750
2
Remove the screws that
hold the stand on.
M4 x 28
3
60PK750
M4 x 30
Detach the stand from TV.
PROTECTION COVER
After removing the stand, install the included
PROTECTION COVER over the hole for the
stand.
Press the PROTECTION COVER into the TV until
you hear it click.
When installing the wall mounting bracket, use
the PROTECTION COVER.
PROTECTION COVER
Fix a guide to the outside.
21
PREPARATION
STAND INSTRUCTIONS (For 32/42/46/52/60LD550, 47/55LD650)
PREPARATION
ᯫ
Image shown may differ from your TV.
INSTALLATION
1
Carefully place the TV screen side down on
a cushioned surface to protect the screen
from damage.
AC IN
CABLE MANAGEMENT
2
Assemble the parts of the STAND BODY
with the STAND BASE of the TV.
STAND BODY
M4 x 20
STAND BASE
AC IN
CABLE MANAGEMENT
3
Assemble the TV as shown.
4
Install the 4 screws into the holes shown.
M4 x 20
AC IN
CABLE MANAGEMENT
! NOTE
Ź When assembling the desk type stand,
make sure the screws are fully tightened (If
not tightened fully, the TV can tilt forward
after the product installation). Do not over
tighten.
22
PREPARATION
DETACHMENT
1
2
Carefully place the TV screen side down on
a cushioned surface to protect the screen
from damage.
Remove the screws that hold the stand on.
AC IN
CABLE MANAGEMENT
AC IN
CABLE MANAGEMENT
AC IN
3
Detach the stand from TV.
CABLE MANAGEMENT
PROTECTION COVER
After removing the stand, install the included
PROTECTION COVER over the hole for the
stand.
Press the PROTECTION COVER into the TV until
you hear it click.
When installing the wall mounting bracket, use
the PROTECTION COVER.
23
PREPARATION
STAND INSTRUCTIONS
PREPARATION
(For 42/47LE5350, 32/42/47/55LE5400, 42/47/55LE5500, 42/47/55LE7500, 47/55LE8500,
42/47/55LX6500)
ᯫ
Image shown may differ from your TV.
INSTALLATION
1
Carefully place the TV screen side down on
a cushioned surface to protect the screen
from damage.
2
Assemble the parts of the STAND BODY
with the STAND BASE of the TV.
At this time, tighten the screws that hold the
STAND BODY on.
M4 x 20
STAND BODY
M4 x 24
M4 x 26
(47/55LE8500) (55LE5400/5500/7500,
55LX6500, 42LE5350)
M4 x 16
(Other models)
3
Assemble the TV as shown.
4
Assemble the part of the STAND
REAR COVER with the TV.
5
STAND REAR
COVER
Install the 4 screws into the holes shown.
! NOTE
Ź When assembling the desk type stand,
make sure the screws are fully tightened (If
not tightened fully, the TV can tilt forward
after the product installation). Do not over
tighten.
24
(47LE5350)
M4 x 20
(47/55LE8500)
M4 x 16
(Other models)
STAND BASE
1
Carefully place the TV screen side down on
a cushioned surface to protect the screen
from damage.
2
Remove the screws that hold the stand on.
3
Detach the STAND REAR COVER from TV.
4
Detach the stand from TV.
PREPARATION
DETACHMENT
25
PREPARATION
VESA WALL MOUNTING
PREPARATION
Install your wall mount on a solid wall perpendicular to the floor. When attaching to other building materials, please contact your nearest installer.
If installed on a ceiling or slanted wall, it may fall and result in severe personal injury.
We recommend that you use an LG brand wall mount when mounting the TV to a wall.
LG recommends that wall mounting be performed by a qualified professional installer.
VESA (A * B)
Model
B
A
Standard
Screw
Quantity
Wall Mounting Bracket
(sold separately)
LSW100B, LSW100BG
32LD550,
32LE5400
42/46LD550,
47LD650,
42/47LE5350,
42/47LE5400,
42/47LE5500,
42/47LE7500,
47LE8500,
42/47LX6500
52LD550, 55LD650,
55LE5400,
55LE5500,
55LE7500,
55LE8500,
60LD550,
55LX6500
200 * 100
M4
4
LSW200B, LSW200BG
200 * 200
M6
4
LSW400B, LSW400BG,
DSW400BG
400 * 400
M6
4
AW-50PG60M AW-50PG60MS
50PK750
400 * 400
M6
4
AW-60PG60M AW-60PG60MS
60PK750
26
600 * 400
M8
4
PREPARATION
! NOTE
Ź Screw length needed depends on the wall
mount used. For further information, refer to
the instructions included with the mount.
Ź Standard dimensions for wall mount kits are
shown in the table.
Ź When purchasing our wall mount kit, a detailed
installation manual and all parts necessary for
assembly are provided.
Ź Do not use screws longer than the standard
dimension, as they may cause damage to the
inside to the TV.
Ź For wall mounts that do not comply with the
VESA standard screw specifications, the length
of the screws may differ depending on their
specifications.
Ź Do not use screws that do not comply with the
VESA standard screw specifications.
Do not use fasten the screws too strongly, this
may damage the TV or cause the TV to a fall,
leading to personal injury. LG is not liable for
these kinds of accidents.
Ź LG is not liable for TV damage or personal
injury when a non-VESA or non specified wall
mount is used or the consumer fails to follow
the TV installation instructions.
CAUTION
Ź Do not install your wall mount kit while your TV is turned on. It may result in personal injury due to
electric shock.
27
PREPARATION
CABLE MANAGEMENT
PREPARATION
ᯫ
Image shown may differ from your TV.
Plasma TV
1
After connecting the cables as necessary, install the CABLE HOLDER as shown and bundle the
cables.
In case of the LAN cable, install as shown to reduce the electromagnetic wave.
CABLE HOLDER
28
PREPARATION
ᯫ
Image shown may differ from your TV.
32/42/46/52/60LD550, 47/55LD650
1
2
Connect the cables as necessary.
To connect additional equipment, see the
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP section.
AC IN
Open the CABLE MANAGEMENT CLIP as
shown.
AC IN
CABLE MANAGEMENT CLIP
3
Put the cables inside the CABLE
MANAGEMENT CLIP and snap it closed.
AC IN
29
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
ᯫ
Image shown may differ from your TV.
42/47LE5350, 32/42/47/55LE5400, 42/47/55LE5500, 42/47/55LE7500, 47/55LE8500,
42/47/55LX6500
1
Secure the power cord with the CABLE
HOLDER on the TV back cover.
It will help prevent the power cable from
being removed by accident.
CABLE HOLDER
2
After connecting the cables as necessary,
install the CABLE HOLDER as shown
and bundle the cables.
CABLE HOLDER
30
DESKTOP PEDESTAL INSTALLATION
Image shown may differ from your TV.
For proper ventilation, allow a clearance of 10.1 cm (4 inch) on all four sides from the wall.
10.1 cm (4 inch)
PREPARATION
ᯫ
10.1 cm (4 inch)
10.1 cm (4 inch)
10.1 cm (4 inch)
CAUTION
Ź Ensure adequate ventilation by following the clearance recommendations.
Ź Do not mount near or above any type of heat source.
SWIVEL STAND
After installing the TV, you can adjust the TV set manually to the left or right direction by 20 º to suit
your viewing position.
31
PREPARATION
ATTACHING THE TV TO A DESK (For 32/42LD550, 32LE5400)
PREPARATION
ᯫ
Image shown may differ from your TV.
The TV must be attached to a desk so it cannot be pulled in a forward/backward direction, potentially causing injury or damaging the product.
Stand
1-Screw
(provided as parts of the product)
Desk
WARNING
Ź To prevent TV from falling over, the TV should be securely attached to the floor/wall per installation instructions. Tipping, shaking, or rocking the machine may cause injury.
KENSINGTON SECURITY SYSTEM
ᯫ
This feature is not available for all models.
- The TV is equipped with a Kensington Security System connector on the back panel. Connect the Kensington Security
System cable as shown below.
- For the detailed installation and use of the Kensington Security
System, refer to the user’s guide provided with the Kensington
Security System.
For further information, contact http://www.kensington.com,
the internet homepage of the Kensington company. Kensington
sells security systems for expensive electronic equipment such
as notebook PCs and LCD projectors.
NOTE: The Kensington Security System is an optional accessory.
32
ᯫ
ᯫ
You should purchase necessary components to prevent the TV from tipping over (when not using a
wall mount).
Image shown may differ from your TV.
We recommend that you set up the TV close to a wall so it cannot fall over if pushed backwards.
Additionally, we recommend that the TV be attached to a wall so it cannot be pulled in a forward
direction, potentially causing injury or damaging the product.
Caution: Please make sure that children don’t climb on or hang from the TV.
ᯫ
PREPARATION
SECURING THE TV TO THE WALL TO PREVENT FALLING
WHEN THE TV IS USED ON A STAND
Insert the eye-bolts (or TV brackets and bolts) to tighten the product to the wall as shown in the
picture.
* If your product has the bolts in the eye-bolts position before inserting the eye-bolts, loosen the
bolts.
* Insert the eye-bolts or TV brackets/bolts and tighten them securely in the upper holes.
Secure the wall brackets with the bolts (sold separately) to the wall. Match the height of the bracket
that is mounted on the wall to the holes in the product.
Ensure the eye-bolts or brackets are tightened securely.
ᯫ
Use a sturdy rope (sold separately) to tie the product. It is safer to tie the
rope so it becomes horizontal between the wall and the product.
! NOTE
Ź Use a platform or cabinet strong enough and large enough to support the size and weight of
the TV.
Ź To use the TV safely make sure that the height of the bracket on the wall and the one on the TV are
the same.
33
PREPARATION
ᯫ
PREPARATION
ᯫ
To prevent damage do not connect to the power outlet until all connections are made between the
devices.
Image shown may differ from your TV.
ANTENNA OR CABLE CONNECTION
1. Antenna (Analog or Digital)
Wall Antenna Socket or Outdoor Antenna without a Cable Box Connections.
For optimum picture quality, adjust antenna direction if needed.
Wall
Antenna
Socket
Outdoor
Antenna
(VHF, UHF)
Multi-family Dwellings/Apartments
(Connect to wall antenna socket)
ANTENNA/
CABLE IN
RF Coaxial Wire (75 Ω)
Single-family Dwellings /Houses
(Connect to wall jack for outdoor antenna)
Copper Wire
Be careful not to bend the copper wire
when connecting the antenna.
2. Cable
ANTENNA/
CABLE IN
Cable TV
Wall Jack
RF Coaxial Wire (75 Ω)
ᯫ
ᯫ
34
If the antenna needs to be split for two TV’s, install a 2-Way Signal Splitter.
For much more information about antennas visit our Knowledgebase at http://lgknowledgebase.
com. Search for antenna.
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
ᯫ
To prevent the equipment damage, never plug in any power cords until you have finished connecting all
equipment.
ᯫ
Image shown may differ from your TV.
HD RECEIVER SETUP
Component Connection
1. How to connect
Y
1
Connect the video outputs (Y, PB, PR) of the
digital set-top box to the COMPONENT IN
VIDEO 1, 2, or 3* jacks on the TV. Match the
jack colors (Y = green, PB = blue, and PR = red).
2
Connect the audio output of the digital set-top
box to the COMPONENT IN AUDIO 1, 2, or 3*
jacks on the TV.
PB
PR
L
1
R
2
RS-232C IN
RGB IN (PC)
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
This TV can receive digital over-the-air/digital cable signals without an external digital set-top box.
However, if you do receive digital signals from a digital set-top box or other digital external device.
(SERVICE ONLY)
/DVI IN
2. How to use
Turn on the digital set-top box.
(Refer to the owner’s manual for the digital settop box operation.)
Select the Component1, Component2, or
Component3 input source on the TV using the
INPUT button on the remote control.
* Component3: For LED LCD TV
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
1
AUDIO IN
AUDIO OUT
VIDEO L(MONO) AUDIO R
2
Y
PB
PR
L
R
1
VIDEO
AUDIO
COMPONENT IN
ᯫ
(RGB/DVI)
2
AV IN 1
ᯫ
3
Y, CB/PB, CR/PR
Resolution
720x480i
720x480p
1280x720p
1920x1080i
1920x1080p
Horizontal
Frequency(KHz)
Vertical
Frequency(Hz)
15.73
59.94
15.73
60.00
31.47
59.94
31.50
60.00
44.96
59.94
45.00
60.00
33.72
59.94
33.75
60.00
26.97
23.976
27.00
24.00
33.71
29.97
33.75
30.00
67.432
59.94
67.50
60.00
35
COMPONENT IN3
AUDIO / Y PB PR
AV IN2
VIDEO / AUDIO
H/P
USB IN 1
USB IN 2
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
36
IN 4
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
For LED LCD TV
1
2
R
L
PR
PB
Y
HDMI Connection
LAN
1
(SERVICE
3
(RGB/DVI) OPTICAL DIGITAL
Connect the digital set-top box to HDMI/DVI IN
1, 2, 3, or 4 jack on the TV.
2
AUDIO IN
ꔡ
2
RS-232
RGB IN (PC)
/DVI IN
No separate audio connection is necessary.
HDMI supports both audio and video.
1
WIRELESS
CONTROL
ᯫ
Turn on the digital set-top box.
(Refer to the owner’s manual for the digital settop box.)
ᯫ
Select the HDMI1, HDMI2, HDMI3, or HDMI4 input
source on the TV using the INPUT button on the
remote control.
2
Y
PB
PR
L
1
VIDEO
1
2. How to use
VIDEO L(MONO
AUDIO OUT
A
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
1. How to connect
HDMI OUTPUT
! NOTE
Ź If an HDMI cable doesn’t support High Speed HDMI,
it can cause flickers or no screen display. In this case
use the latest cables that support High Speed HDMI.
Ź HDMI Audio Supported Format: Dolby Digital (32 KHz, 44.1
KHz, 48 KHz), Linear PCM (32 KHz, 44.1 KHz, 48 KHz)
HDMI-DTV
Resolution
720x480p
1280x720p
1920x1080i
1920x1080p
Horizontal
Frequency(KHz)
Vertical
Frequency(Hz)
31.47
59.94
31.50
60.00
44.96
59.94
45.00
60.00
33.72
59.94
33.75
60.00
26.97
23.976
27.00
24.00
33.71
29.97
33.75
30.00
67.432
59.94
67.50
60.00
37
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
DVI to HDMI Connection
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
1. How to connect
1
2
(RGB/DVI) OPTICAL DIGITAL
2
AUDIO IN
ꔡ
1
WIRELESS
CONTROL
2
Y
PB
ᯫ
Select the HDMI1, HDMI2, HDMI3, or HDMI4* input
source on the TV using the INPUT button on the
remote control.
! NOTE
Ź A DVI to HDMI cable or adapter is required for this connection. DVI doesn't support audio, so a separate audio
connection is necessary.
PR
L
R
1
VIDEO
2. How to use
Turn on the digital set-top box.
(Refer to the owner’s manual for the digital settop box.)
VIDEO L(MONO) AUDIO R
AUDIO OUT
1
* HDMI4: For Plasma TV
38
3
Connect the digital set-top box audio output to
the AUDIO IN (RGB/DVI) jack on the TV.
ᯫ
(SERVICE ONLY)
/DVI IN
LAN
Connect the DVI output of the digital set-top
box to the HDMI/DVI IN 1, 2, 3, or 4* jack on
the TV.
RS-232C IN
RGB IN (PC)
2
DVI OUTPUT
L
R
AUDIO
AUDIO
DVD SETUP
Component Connection
1
Connect the video outputs (Y, PB, PR) of the
DVD to the COMPONENT IN VIDEO 1, 2, or 3*
jacks on the TV.
Match the jack colors (Y = green, PB = blue, and
PR = red).
2
Connect the audio outputs of the DVD to the
COMPONENT IN AUDIO 1, 2, or 3* jacks on the
TV.
Y
PB
(SERVICE ONLY)
3
2
AUDIO IN
1
S
L
VIDEO L(MONO) AUDIO R
AUDIO OUT
COMPONENT IN
* Component3: For LED LCD TV
2
Y
PB
PR
L
R
1
AUDIO
VIDEO
Y
PB
PR
Y
B-Y
R-Y
Y
Cb
Cr
Y
Pb
Pr
USB IN 1
1
AV IN2
VIDEO / AUDIO
PR
COMPONENT IN3
AUDIO / Y PB PR
PB
H/P
Y
IN 4
To get better picture quality, connect a DVD player
to the component input ports as shown below.
USB IN 2
For LED LCD TV
Component Input ports
Video output ports
on DVD player
RS-232C IN
RGB IN (PC)
Turn on the DVD player, insert a DVD.
Select the Component1, Component2, or
Component3 input source on the TV using the
INPUT button on the remote control.
Refer to the DVD player’s manual for operating
instructions.
Component ports on
the TV
2
AV IN 1
ᯫ
R
/DVI IN
(RGB/DVI) OPTICAL DIGITAL
ᯫ
L
1
2. How to use
ᯫ
PR
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
1. How to connect
2
R
L
PR
PB
Y
39
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
Composite (RCA) Connection
1
(RGB/DVI) OPTICAL DIGITAL
2
AUDIO IN
1
S
L
ᯫ
VIDEO L(MONO) AUDIO R
AUDIO OUT
2
Y
PB
PR
L
R
1
AUDIO
VIDEO
Turn on the DVD player, insert a DVD.
Select the AV1 or AV2 input source on the TV
using the INPUT button on the remote control.
Refer to the DVD player's manual for operating
instructions.
COMPONENT IN
ᯫ
(SERVICE ONLY)
3
Connect the AUDIO/VIDEO jacks between TV
and DVD. Match the jack colors (Video = yellow,
Audio Left = white, and Audio Right = red)
2. How to use
ᯫ
RS-232C IN
RGB IN (PC)
/DVI IN
AV IN 1
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
1. How to connect
1
VIDEO
L
R
AUDIO
IN 4
VIDEO
40
L
R
AUDIO
AV IN2
VIDEO / AUDIO
H/P
COMPONENT IN3
AUDIO / Y PB PR
USB IN 1
USB IN 2
For LED LCD TV
HDMI Connection
RS-232C IN
RGB IN (PC)
1
Connect the HDMI output of the DVD to the
HDMI/DVI IN 1, 2, 3 or 4 jack on the TV.
LAN
3
AUDIO IN
No separate audio connection is necessary.
HDMI supports both audio and video.
ꔡ
1
WIRELESS
CONTROL
2
Y
PB
2. How to use
ᯫ
PR
L
R
1
VIDEO
ᯫ
VIDEO L(MONO) AUDIO R
AUDIO OUT
1
Select the HDMI1, HDMI2, HDMI3, or HDMI4 input
source on the TV using the INPUT button on the
remote control.
Refer to the DVD player's manual for operating
instructions.
AUDIO
AV IN 1 COMPONENT IN
(RGB/DVI) OPTICAL DIGITAL
2
2
(SERVICE ONLY)
/DVI IN
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
1. How to connect
HDMI OUTPUT
! NOTE
Ź If an HDMI cable doesn’t support High Speed HDMI,
it can cause flickers or no screen display. In this case
use the latest cables that support High Speed HDMI.
Ź HDMI Audio Supported Format: Dolby Digital (32 KHz, 44.1
KHz, 48 KHz), Linear PCM (32 KHz, 44.1 KHz, 48 KHz)
41
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
VCR SETUP
Antenna Connection
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
1. How to connect
1
2
Connect the antenna cable to the RF
antenna in socket of the VCR.
ANTENNA/
CABLE IN
1
ANT OUT
S-VIDEO
ANT IN
OUTPUT
SWITCH
2
VIDEO
L
ᯫ
Set VCR output switch to 3 or 4 and
then tune TV to the same channel number.
Insert a video tape into the VCR and
press PLAY on the VCR (Refer to the
VCR owner’s manual).
AUDIO
Wall Jack
2. How to use
ᯫ
42
Connect the RF antenna out socket
of the VCR to the ANTENNA/CABLE
IN socket on the TV.
Antenna
R
Composite (RCA) Connection
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
1. How to connect
1
Connect the AUDIO/VIDEO jacks between TV
and VCR. Match the jack colors (Video = yellow,
Audio Left = white, and Audio Right = red)
RS-232C IN
RGB IN (PC)
(SERVICE ONLY)
/DVI IN
3
2. How to use
SS
OL
2
Y
PB
PR
L
R
1
AUDIO
VIDEO
1
! NOTE
ŹIf you have a mono VCR, connect the audio cable
from the VCR to the AUDIO L/MONO jack of the TV.
S-VIDEO
ANT OUT
OUTPUT
SWITCH
VIDEO
L
R
AUDIO
AV IN2
VIDEO / AUDIO
IN 4
H/P
COMPONENT IN3
AUDIO / Y PB PR
USB IN 1
For LED LCD TV
ANT IN
USB IN 2
ᯫ
Insert a video tape into the VCR and press PLAY
on the VCR. (Refer to the VCR owner’s manual.)
Select the AV1 or AV2 input source on the TV
using the INPUT button on the remote control.
AUDIO OUT
COMPONENT IN
ᯫ
AUDIO IN
1
VIDEO L(MONO) AUDIO R
AV IN 1
(RGB/DVI) OPTICAL DIGITAL
2
ANT IN
ANT OUT
S-VIDEO VIDEO
L
R
AUDIO
OUTPUT
SWITCH
43
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
OTHER A/V SOURCE SETUP
1. How to connect
Video Game Set
USB IN 2
Connect the AUDIO/VIDEO jacks
between TV and external equipment.
Match the jack colors.
(Video = yellow, Audio Left = white, and
Audio Right = red)
ᯫ
ᯫ
Select the AV1 or AV2 input source on
the TV using the INPUT button on the
remote control.
Operate the corresponding external
equipment.
IN 4
2. How to use
1
AV IN 2
44
L
USB IN 1
VIDEO
VIDEO L(MONO) AUDIO R H/P
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
1
Camcorder
R
2. How to use
USB IN 1
After connecting the USB IN jack, you
use the USB function. (Źp.97)
H/P
ᯫ
IN 4
Connect the USB device to the USB
IN 1 or 2 jack on the side of TV.
L(MONO) AUDIO R
1
or
Memory Key
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
1. How to connect
USB IN 2
USB CONNECTION
45
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
HEADPHONE SETUP (FOR LED LCD TV/LCD TV)
You can listen to the sound through the headphone.
1
Plug the headphone into the headphone socket.
2
To adjust the headphone volume,
press the VOL +/- button. If you
press the MUTE button, the sound
from the headphone is switched off.
! NOTE
ŹAUDIO menu options are disabled when connecting a
headphone.
ŹWhen changing AV MODE with a headphone connected, the change is applied to video but not to audio.
ŹOptical Digital Audio Out is not available when connecting a headphone.
46
H/P
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
1. How to connect
AUDIO OUT CONNECTION
(
1. How to connect
)
(
)
/DVI IN
3
(RGB/DVI) OPTICAL DIGITAL
Connect one end of the optical cable to the
TV port of OPTICAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT.
2
AUDIO IN
1
2
Connect the other end of the optical cable to
the digital audio input on the audio equipment.
3
Set the “TV Speaker option - Off” in the
AUDIO menu. (Źp.150). See the external audio
equipment instruction manual for operation.
LESS
TROL
VIDEO L(MONO) AUDIO R
AUDIO OUT
2
1
Y
PB
PR
L
R
1
VIDEO
2
AUDIO
AV IN 1 COMPONENT IN
1
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
Send the TV’s audio to external audio equipment via the Audio Output port.
If you want to enjoy digital broadcasting through 5.1-channel speakers, connect the OPTICAL DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT terminal on the back of TV to a Home Theater (or amp).
! NOTE
Ź When connecting with external audio equipment, such
as amplifiers or speakers, you can turn the TV speakers
off in the menu. (Źp.150)
CAUTION
Ź Do not look into the optical output port. Looking at
the laser beam may damage your vision.
Ź Audio with ACP (Audio Copy Protection) function may
block digital audio output.
47
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT WIRELESS CONNECTION
(OPTIONAL EXTRAS, EXCEPT 42/42LE5350)
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
LG TVs with a Wireless Control port support the LG Wireless Media Box, which is sold separately.
When you connect the wireless ready dongle (included with the media box) to the TV, external devices
can be connected to the LG Wireless Media Box and video and audio will be sent to the TV wirelessly.
WIRELESS
CONTROL
OUT
RS-232C IN
RGB IN (PC)
(SERVICE ONLY)
/DVI IN
LAN
3
AUDIO IN
ꔡ
1
WIRELESS
CONTROL
VIDEO L(MONO) AUDIO R
AUDIO OUT
2
Y
PB
PR
L
R
1
VIDEO
AUDIO
AV IN 1 COMPONENT IN
(RGB/DVI) OPTICAL DIGITAL
2
1. How to connect
1
Connect the WIRELESS CONTROL jack of the Wireless Ready Dongle to the WIRELESS
CONTROL jack on the TV.
2
Connect HDMI OUT jack of the Wireless Ready Dongle to the HDMI IN jack on the TV.
2. How to use
ᯫ
ᯫ
Select the desired input source on the TV using the INPUT button on the remote control.
Refer to the Wireless Media Box manual for operating instructions.
! NOTE
ŹWhen using the external device connected to the Wireless Media Box, some functions of the TV
menu may not work.
48
PC SETUP
This TV provides Plug and Play capability, meaning that a PC adjusts automatically to the TV's settings.
RS-232C IN
RGB IN (PC)
1. How to connect
LAN
3
Connect the VGA output of the PC to the
RGB IN (PC) jack on the TV.
ꔡ
IRELESS
ONTROL
2
AUDIO IN
1
VIDEO L(MONO) AUDIO R
AUDIO OUT
2
Y
PB
PR
L
R
1
2
Connect PC audio output to the AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI) jack on the TV.
VIDEO
2. How to use
ᯫ
ᯫ
2
1
AUDIO
RGB OUTPUT
AUDIO
AV IN 1 COMPONENT IN
(RGB/DVI) OPTICAL DIGITAL
1
(SERVICE ONLY)
/DVI IN
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
VGA (D-Sub 15 Pin) Connection
Turn on the PC and the TV.
Select the RGB-PC input source on the TV using
the INPUT button on the remote control.
49
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
DVI to HDMI Connection
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
1. How to connect
3
(RGB/DVI) OPTICAL DIGITAL
Connect the DVI output of the PC to the HDMI/
DVI IN 1, 2, 3, or 4* jack on the TV.
2
AUDIO IN
ꔡ
2
Connect the PC audio output to the AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI) jack on the TV.
2. How to use
ᯫ
ᯫ
1
WIRELESS
CONTROL
VIDEO L(MONO) AU
AUDIO OUT
2
Y
PB
PR
L
1
VIDEO
1
2
Turn on the PC and the TV.
Select the HDMI1, HDMI2, HDMI3, or HDMI4* input
source on the TV using the INPUT button on the
remote control.
* HDMI4: For Plasma TV
DVI OUTPUT
50
(SERVICE ONL
/DVI IN
LAN
1
RS-232C I
RGB IN (PC)
AUDIO
AUDI
! NOTE
ŹDepending on the graphics card, DOS mode may not work if a HDMI to DVI Cable is in use.
ŹIn PC mode, there may be noise associated with the resolution, vertical pattern, contrast or brightness. If noise is present, change the PC output to another resolution, change the refresh rate to
another rate or adjust the brightness and contrast on the PICTURE menu until the picture is clear.
ŹAvoid keeping a fixed image on the screen for a long period of time. The fixed image may become
permanently imprinted on the screen.
ŹThe synchronization input form for Horizontal and Vertical frequencies is separate.
ŹDepending on the graphics card, some resolution settings may not allow the image to be positioned on the screen properly.
ŹIf you experience overscan issues when using HDMI-PC 1920x1080, change aspect ratio to Just
scan.
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
ŹTo get the the best picture quality, adjust the PC graphics card to 1920x1080.
ŹWhen selecting HDMI-PC, set the “Input Label - PC” in the OPTION menu.
Supported Display Specifications (RGB-PC, HDMI-PC)
Resolution
Horizontal
Frequency (KHz)
Vertical
Frequency (Hz)
640x350
31.468
70.09
720x400
31.469
70.08
640x480
31.469
59.94
800x600
37.879
60.31
1024x768
48.363
60.00
1280x768
47.776
59.87
1360x768
47.712
60.015
1280x1024
63.981
60.02
1920x1080
RGB-PC
66.587
59.934
1920x1080
HDMI-PC
67.50
60.00
51
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
Screen Setup for PC mode
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
Selecting Resolution
You can choose the resolution in RGB-PC mode.
The Position, Phase, and Size can also be adjusted.
You can choose this option only when the PC resolution is set to 1024X768, 1280X768 or 1360X768.
3,&785(
ᯒ0RYHᯙ(QWHU
6&5((1
5HVROXWLRQ
ؒ&R
&
&R
& ORU
ORU
ORU
ؒ7LQW
5
*
ؒ&RORU7HPS
:
&
ؒ$GYDQFHG&RQWURO
ؒ3LFWXUH5HVHW
3RVLWLRQ
6L]H
ؒ 7UX0RWLRQ
ؒ 6FUHHQ5*%3&
$XWR&RQILJ
ᯙ
ᯐ
ؒ /('/RFDO'LPPLQJ2Q
3KDVH
5HVHW
1
2
3
4
5
52
MENU
Select PICTURE.
ENTER
Select Screen (RGB-PC).
ENTER
Select Resolution.
ENTER
Select the desired resolution.
ENTER
ᯒ0RYHᰙ3UHY
ᯡ[
۳[
۳[
Auto Configure
Screen Reset (Reset to original initial values)
Returns Position, Size, and Phase to the default initial settings.
This feature operates only in RGB-PC mode.
3,&785(
ᯒ0RYHᯙ(QWHU
ؒ&R
&
&R
& ORU
ORU
ORU
ؒ7LQW
5
*
ؒ&RORU7HPS
:
&
ؒ$GYDQFHG&RQWURO
ؒ3LFWXUH5HVHW
ᯙ
ᯐ
ؒ /('/RFDO'LPPLQJ2Q
1
2
3
4
5
ᯒ0RYHᰙ3UHY
5HVROXWLRQ
$XWR&RQILJ
$XWR&RQILJ
6L]H
$XWR&RQILJ
<HV
Select Screen (RGB-PC).
ENTER
Select Auto Config. or
Reset.
ENTER
Select Yes.
6L]H
5HVHW
5HVHW
ᯫ
ᯒ0RYHᰙ3UHY
3RVLWLRQ
3KDVH
Select PICTURE.
ENTER
1R
3KDVH
ᯫ
MENU
6&5((1
5HVROXWLRQ
3RVLWLRQ
ؒ 7UX0RWLRQ
ؒ 6FUHHQ5*%3&
6&5((1
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
Automatically adjusts picture position and minimizes image instability. After adjustment, if the image
is still not correct, try using the manual settings or a different resolution or refresh rate on the PC.
7R6HW
<HV
1R
If the position of the image is still not
correct, try Auto adjustment again.
If picture needs to be adjusted again
after Auto adjustment in RGB-PC,
you can adjust the Position, Size or
Phase.
ENTER
53
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
Adjustment for screen Position, Size, and Phase
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
If the picture is not clear after auto adjustment or if text is shaking, adjust the picture phase manually.
This feature operates only in RGB-PC mode.
3,&785(
ᯒ0RYHᯙ(QWHU
6&5((1
5HVROXWLRQ
ؒ&R
& ORU
&R
ORU
ORU
ؒ7LQW
5
*
ؒ&RORU7HPS
:
&
ؒ$GYDQFHG&RQWURO
ؒ3LFWXUH5HVHW
‫ۻ‬
$XWR&RQILJ
3RVLWLRQ
ؒ 7UX0RWLRQ
ؒ 6FUHHQ5*%3&
ᯒ0RYHᰙ3UHY
‫܁‬
‫۽‬
6L]H
ᯙ
ᯐ
‫ۿ‬
3KDVH
ؒ /('/RFDO'LPPLQJ2Q
5HVHW
1
2
3
MENU
Select PICTURE.
ENTER
Select Screen (RGB-PC).
ENTER
Select Position, Size, or Phase.
ᯫ
ᯫ
ᯫ
4
5
54
ENTER
ENTER
Make appropriate adjustments.
Position: This function is to adjust
picture to left/right and up/down as
you prefer.
Size: This function is to minimize any
vertical bars or stripes visible on the
screen background. And the horizontal screen size will also change.
Phase: This function allows you to
remove any horizontal noise and
clear or sharpen the image of characters.
NETWORK SETUP
Wired Network Connection
RS-232C IN
RGB IN (PC)
(SERVICE ONLY)
/DVI IN
LAN
1
3
ꔡ
WIRELESS
CONTROL
AUDIO IN
1
VIDEO L(MONO) AUDIO R
AUDIO OUT
2
Y
PB
PR
L
R
1
VIDEO
Broadband modem
Broadband Service
AUDIO
AV IN 1 COMPONENT IN
(RGB/DVI) OPTICAL DIGITAL
2
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
This TV can be connected to a local area network (LAN) via the LAN port. After making the physical
connection, the TV needs to be set up for network communication.
Router
Broadband modem
Broadband Service
1. How to connect
1
Connect the LAN port of the Modem or Router to the LAN port on the TV.
2. How to use
ᯫ
ᯫ
ᯫ
Select “Network Setting” in the NETWORK menu.
After connecting the LAN port, use the NETCAST menu.
For more information about NETCAST setup and troubleshooting, visit http://lgknowledgebase.
com. Search for NETCAST.
CAUTION
Ź Do not connect a modular phone cable to the LAN port.
Ź Since there are various connection methods, please follow the specifications of your telecommunication carrier or internet service provider.
55
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
Wired Network Setup
If wired and wireless networks are both available, wired is the preferred method.
After making a physical connection, a small number of home networks may require the TV network
settings to be adjusted.
For detail information, contact your internet provider or router manual.
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
1(7:25.
If you already set the
Network Setting
ᯒ0RYHᯙ(QWHU
:LUHG
ؒ 1HWZRUN6WDWXV
:LUHGQHWZRUNLVUHFRPPHQGHG
,QWHUQHWLVFRQQHFWHG
:LUHG
ؒ /HJDO1RWLFH
3UHYLRXVVHWWLQJYDOXHH[LVWV'R
\RXZDQWWRFRQQHFWZLWKWKH
SUHYLRXVVHWWLQJ"
1HWZRUN7\SH
ؒ 1HWZRUN6HWWLQJ
ؒ (61
(QWHU
:LUHOHVV
5HVHWWLQJ
ᯙ1H[W
Appeared when wired and
wireless are simultaneously
connected.
IP Auto Setting
1HWZRUN6HWWLQJ
IP Manual Setting
1HWZRUN6HWWLQJ
1HWZRUN6WDWXV
79
1HWZRUNFRQQHFWLQJ
6HWWLQJ
7HVW
6HOHFWWKH,3VHWWLQJPRGH
,QVHUWWKH,3DGGUHVV
,30RGH
,30RGH
‫܁‬,3$XWR6HWWLQJ‫۽‬
1
ᯘ,3$GGUHVV
ᯘ6XEQHW0DVN
ᯘ6XEQHW0DVN
ᯘ*DWHZD\
ᯘ*DWHZD\
ᯘ'166HUYHU
ᯘ'166HUYHU
(QWHU
&ORVH
Select NETWORK.
MENU
ENTER
Select Network Setting.
ENTER
Select Wired.
3
ᯫ
ᯫ
ᯫ
ENTER
If you already set Network Setting:
Select Resetting. The new connection
settings resets the current network
settings.
ENTER
Select IP Auto Setting or IP Manual
Setting.
4
5
1
2 ABC 3 DEF
4 GHI 5 JKL 6 MNO
7PQRS 8 TUV 9 WXYZ
0
6
ENTER
When Selecting IP Manual Setting:
IP addresses will need to be input
manually.
Select Enter.
(QWHU
᰿([LW
ᯫ
2
‫܁‬,30DQXDO6HWWLQJ‫۽‬
ᯘ,3$GGUHVV
ᰙ3UHYLRXV
56
᰿([LW
ᯫ
ᯫ
ᰙ3UHYLRXV
᰿([LW
This feature requires an always-on
broadband internet connection.
You do not need to connect to a PC
to use this function.
If Network Setting is not working,
check your network conditions. Check
the LAN cable and make sure your
router has DHCP turned on if you
wish to use the Auto Setting.
If the Network Setting is not completed, network may not operate normally.
IP Auto Setting: Select it if there is a
DHCP server on the local area network (LAN) via wired connection, the
TV will automatically be allocated an
IP address. If you’re using a broadband router or broadband modem
that has a DHCP (Dynamic Host
Configuration Protocol) server function. The IP address will automatically be determined.
IP Manual Setting: Select it if there is
no DHCP server on the network and
you want to set the IP address manually.
! NOTE
Ź The use of a “Router” may not be allowed or
its usage may be limited depending on the
policies and restrictions of your ISP. For details,
contact your ISP directly.
Ź The wireless network operates at 2.4 GHz
radio frequencies that are also used by other
household devices such as cordless telephone, Bluetooth® devices, microwave oven,
and can be affected by interference from
them. It can be interrupted by the device
using 5Ghz radio frequencies. It is same
device with LG wireless media box, cordless
telephone, other Wi-Fi device.
Ź It may decrease the service speed using
Wireless network by surrounding wireless condition.
Ź Turn off all unused network equipment in your
local home network. Some devices may generate network traffic.
Ź In some instances, placing the access point or
wireless router higher up away from the floor
may improve the reception.
Ź The reception quality over wireless depends
on many factors such as type of the access
point, distance between the TV and access
point, and the location of the TV.
Ź When connecting internet through the wired/
wireless sharing machine, it may interrupt the
connection because of the use limitation and
confirmation of service company.
Ź To connect wireless AP, an AP that supports
the wireless connection is necessary, and the
wireless connection function of the AP needs
to be activated. Please enquire to the AP supplier for the possibility of AP wireless connections.
Ź Please verify the security settings of AP SSID
for wireless AP connection, and enquire to the
AP supplier for the AP SSID security settings.
Ź The TV can become slower or malfunction
with wrong settings of network equipments
(wired/wireless router, hub, etc). Please install
correctly by referring to the manual of the
equipment, and set the network.
Ź When AP is set to include 802.11 n, and if
Encryption is designated as WEP(64/128bit)
or WPA(TKIP/AES), the connection may not
be possible. There may be different connection methods according to the AP manufacturers.
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
Ź For more information about NETCAST setup
and troubleshooting, visit http://lgknowledgebase.com. Search for NETCAST.
Ź Use a standard LAN cable with this TV. Cat5
or better with a RJ45 connector.
Ź Many network connection problems during set
up can often be fixed by re-setting the router
or modem. After connecting the player to the
home network, quickly power off and/or disconnect the power cable of the home network
router or cable modem. Then power on and/or
connect the power cable again.
Ź Depending on the internet service provider
(ISP), the number of devices that can receive
internet service may be limited by the applicable terms of service. For details, contact
your ISP.
Ź LG is not responsible for any malfunction of
the TV and/or the internet connection feature
due to communication errors/malfunctions
associated with your broadband internet connection, or other connected equipment.
Ź LG is not responsible for problems within your
internet connection.
Ź Some content available through the network
connection may not be compatible with the
TV. If you have questions about such content,
please contact the producer of the content.
Ź You may experience undesired results if the
network connection speed does not meet the
requirements of the content being accessed.
Ź Some internet connection operations may not
be possible due to certain restrictions set by
the Internet service provider (ISP) supplying
your broadband Internet connection.
Ź Any fees charged by an ISP including, without
limitation, connection charges are your responsibility.
Ź A 10 Base-T or 100 Base-TX LAN port is
required for connection to this TV. If your internet service does not allow for such a connection, you will not be able to connect the TV.
Ź A DSL modem is required to use DSL service
and a cable modem is required to use cable
modem service. Depending on the access
method of and subscriber agreement with
your ISP, you may not be able to use the internet connection feature contained in this TV or
you may be limited to the number of devices
you can connect at the same time. (If your ISP
limits subscription to one device, this TV may
not be allowed to connect when a PC is
already connected.)
57
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
Wireless Network Connection (Except 42/47LE5350)
USB IN 2
USB IN 1
IN 4
VIDEO L(MONO) AUDIO R H/P
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
The LG Wireless LAN for Broadband/DLNA Adaptor, which is sold separately, allows the TV to connect
to a wireless lan network.
The network configuration and connection method may vary depending on the equipment in use and
the network environment. Refer to the setup instructions supplied with your access point or wireless
router for detailed connection steps and network settings.
AV IN 2
1. How to connect
1
Connect the “LG Wireless LAN for Broadband/DLNA Adaptor (sold separately)” to the USB
IN 1 or 2 port on the TV.
2. How to use
ᯫ
ᯫ
Select “Network Setting” in the NETWORK menu.
After connecting, you can use the NETCAST menu.
! NOTE
ŹFor enjoying pictures, music, or video stored in the PC using the router, the use of wired port in
the router is recommended.
ŹWhen the wireless port of the router is used, there may be restrictions for some functions.
58
Wireless Network Setup (Except 42/47LE5350)
Setting up the AP (Access Point) or the wireless router is required before connecting the TV to the
network.
ᯒ0RYHᯙ(QWHU
ؒ 1HWZRUN6HWWLQJ
:LUHG
ؒ 1HWZRUN6WDWXV
,QWHUQHWLVFRQQHFWHG
1HWZRUN7\SH
:LUHGQHWZRUNLVUHFRPPHQGHG
ؒ /HJDO1RWLFH
ؒ (61
6HOHFWLQJWKHZLUHOHVVQHWZRUNVHWWLQJW\SH
3UHYLRXVVHWWLQJYDOXHH[LVWV'R
\RXZDQWWRFRQQHFWZLWKWKH
SUHYLRXVVHWWLQJ"
:LUHG
(QWHU
:LUHOHVV
5HVHWWLQJ
6HOHFWWKHZLUHOHVVQHWZRUNVHWWLQJW\SH
6HWWLQJIURPWKH$3OLVW
6LPSOHVHWWLQJ:36EXWWRQPRGH
6HWWLQJ$GKRFQHWZRUN
ᯙ1H[W
᰿([LW
ᯙ1H[W
ᰙ3UHYLRXV
᰿([LW
Appeared when wired and wireless
are simultaneously connected.
If your AP is locked
1HWZRUN6HWWLQJ
,30RGH
‫܁‬,3$XWR6HWWLQJ‫۽‬
ᯘ,3$GGUHVV
ᯘ6XEQHW0DVN
ᯘ*DWHZD\
ᯘ'166HUYHU
1
2
‫܁‬
᰿([LW
&DQFHO
ᯙ1H[W
ᰙ3UHY
6
ENTER
ENTER
Select an AP (Access Point) or
wireless router on the list.
(If your AP is locked, insert the
security key of AP).
ENTER
Input the security key of AP.
Select Wireless.
If you already set Network
Setting: Select Resetting.
The new connection settings
resets the current network settings.
᰿([LW
Scan the all available AP (Access
Point) or wireless routers within range
and display them as a list.
7
1
ENTER
ᰙ3UHYLRXV
᰿([LW
8
5
$FFHVV3RLQW
6HDUFK
ᯕ&RQQHFWLQJZLWK3,1PRGH
(QWHU
Select Network Setting.
ENTER
LSWLPH
1HWZRUN
ENTER
4
‫۽‬
$6:
Select NETWORK.
ENTER
3DJH
,QSXWWKHQHZ66,'
,QVHUWa$6&,,FKDUDFWHUV
MENU
3
6HOHFW$3\RXZDQWWRFRQQHFW
,QVHUWWKHVHFXULW\NH\RI$3
(QWHU
ᰙ3UHYLRXV
6HOHFWLQJ$3
,QVHUWLQJWKHVHFXULW\NH\
6HOHFWWKH,3VHWWLQJPRGH
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
1(7:25.
If you already set the
Network Setting
2 ABC 3 DEF
4 GHI 5 JKL 6 MNO
7PQRS 8 TUV 9 WXYZ
0
9
Repeat step 4-5 on P.56.
Select Setting from the AP list.
59
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
When a security code is already set
PIN (Personal Identification Number)
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
If you want to connect the AP (Access Point) or router with PIN, use this feature.
6HOHFWLQJ$3
&RQQHFWLQJZLWK3,1PRGH
6HOHFW$3\RXZDQWWRFRQQHFW
3DJH
,QVHUW3,1QXPEHUDWWKH$3ZHESDJHDQG
SUHVV؋&RQQHFW،EXWWRQ
,QSXWWKHQHZ66,'
3,118%0(5
LSWLPH
&RQQHFW
$6:
$FFHVV3RLQW
6HDUFK
1HWZRUN
)RUPRUHLQIRUPDWLRQFKHFNWKH$3PDQXDO
ᯙ1H[W
ᯕ&RQQHFWLQJZLWK3,1PRGH
ᰙ3UHYLRXV
ᯙ1H[W
ᰙ3UHYLRXV
1
2
3
᰿([LW
Repeat step 1-6 on P.59.
RED
᰿([LW
4
Connect the acccess point with PIN
mode.
You can see the Network ID and Security Key
on your TV screen.
Enter the PIN number to your device.
5
ᯫ
Select Connect.
ENTER
Repeat step 4-5 on P.56.
PIN number is the unique 8 digit number
of the dongle.
Simple setting (WPS-button mode)
If your access point or wireless router that supports PIN or WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup), it’s available
to use your access point or wireless router within 120 counts. You do not need to know the access
point name (SSID: Service Set Identifier) and security code of your access point or wireless router.
6HOHFWWKHZLUHOHVVQHWZRUNVHWWLQJW\SH
6HOHFWWKHZLUHOHVVQHWZRUNVHWWLQJW\SH
6LPSOHVHWWLQJ:36EXWWRQPRGH
3UHVV3%&0RGHEXWWRQRI$3DQGSUHVV؋&RQQHFW،EXWWRQ
6HWWLQJIURPWKH$3OLVW
&RQQHFW
6LPSOHVHWWLQJ:36EXWWRQPRGH
&DXWLRQ&KHFNLI3%&PRGHEXWWRQLVDYDLODEOHIRU\RXU$3
6HWWLQJ$GKRFQHWZRUN
ᯙ1H[W
ᯙ1H[W
ᰙ3UHYLRXV
1
ᰙ3UHYLRXV
Repeat step 1-4 on P.59.
2
ENTER
60
᰿([LW
Select Simple setting (WPSbutton mode).
᰿([LW
3
4
ENTER
Select Connect.
Repeat step 4-5 on P.56.
AD-hoc Mode
This is the method of communicating directly with the machine to communicate without AP.
This is the same as connecting two PCs with a cross cable.
6HWWLQJ$GKRFQHWZRUN
6HWWLQJ$GKRFQHWZRUN
6HOHFWWKHZLUHOHVVQHWZRUNVHWWLQJW\SH
,QVHUWWKHVHWWLQJLQIRUPDWLRQLQWRWKHGHYLFH
)HDWXUHVXVLQJH[LWLQJQHWZRUNFDQEHXQDYDLODEOH'R\RX
6HWWLQJIURPWKH$3OLVW
1HWZRUN,'66,'/*79
ZDQWWRFKDQJHQHWZRUNFRQQHFWLRQ"
6HFXULW\.H\
6LPSOHVHWWLQJ:36EXWWRQPRGH
(QWHU
6HWWLQJ$GKRFQHWZRUN
&DQFHO
ᯙ1H[W
ᰙ3UHYLRXV
ᯕ&KDQJLQJWKHVHWWLQJLQIRUPDWLRQ
ᯙ1H[W
ᰙ3UHYLRXV
᰿([LW
&RQQHFW
᰿([LW
ᰙ3UHYLRXV
,30RGH
6LJQDO6WUHQJWK
*DWHZD\
6HWWLQJ
0DF$GGUHVV
,3$GGUHVV 6XEQHW0DVN *DWHZD\
7HVW
,QVHUWWKHVHWWLQJLQIRUPDWLRQLQWRWKHGHYLFH
,QVHUWWKH,3DGGUHVV
$GKRFQHWZRUNLVFRQQHFWHG
/*79
79
1HWZRUN,'66,'/*79
,30DQXDO6HWWLQJ
ᯘ,3$GGUHVV
ᯘ6XEQHW0DVN
ᯘ*DWHZD\
ᯘ'166HUYHU
6HFXULW\.H\
&RQQHFWLQJWKH$GKRFQHWZRUN
&DQFHO
(QWHU
&ORVH
᰿([LW
ᯫ
PC Setting
Internet Protocol(TCP/IP) of PC needs to be set
manually.
IP address, Subnet Mask, and default Gateway
can be set with your own discretion.
i.e) IP address: 192.168.0.1 / Subnet Mask:
255.255.255.0 / default Gateway: 192.168.0.10
ᯫ
TV Setting
Verify IP address and gateway of PC.
Input Gateway address of PC to IP Address, and
IP Address of PC to Gateway, and select Enter.
i.e) IP address: 192.168.0.10 / Subnet Mask:
255.255.255.0 / default Gateway: 192.168.0.1
2
Repeat step 1-3 on P.59.
ENTER
Select Setting AD-hoc network.
3
ENTER
4
ENTER
ENTER
Example of the PC setting that
supports a wireless network
1. Find a wireless network device in
your PC.
2. Select LGTV10 that appears in
the list. (Select the same name
as the network ID that appears
on your TV screen.)
3. Type 1111111111 in the Inserting
the security key dialog.
(Type the security key that
appears on your TV screen.)
ᯫ
ᰙ3UHYLRXV
1
᰿([LW
6HWWLQJ$GKRFQHWZRUN
1HWZRUN6HWWLQJ
1HWZRUN6WDWXV
ᯙ1H[W
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
6HOHFWLQJWKHZLUHOHVVQHWZRUNVHWWLQJW\SH
5
6
ENTER
Insert the IP address.
ENTER
Network setting is completed.
Select Close.
Select Enter.
Select Connect to connect Ad-hoc
network.
You can see the Network ID and
Security Key on your TV screen.
Enter this Network ID and Security
Key to your device.
If a network may not operate,
change the setting information
using the RED button.
61
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
Network Status
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
1(7:25.
1HWZRUN6WDWXV
ᯒ0RYHᯙ(QWHU
79
ؒ 1HWZRUN6HWWLQJ
:LUHG
ؒ 1HWZRUN6WDWXV
,QWHUQHWLVFRQQHFWHG
1HWZRUNFRQQHFWLQJ
ؒ /HJDO1RWLFH
ؒ (61
6HWWLQJ
7HVW
&ORVH
6HOHFWWKHZLUHOHVVQHWZRUNVHWWLQJW\SH
1HWZRUN6HWWLQJ
6HOHFWWKHZLUHOHVVQHWZRUNVHWWLQJW\SH
6HOHFWWKH,3VHWWLQJPRGH
,30RGH
‫܁‬,3$XWR6HWWLQJ‫۽‬
ᯘ,3$GGUHVV
ᯘ6XEQHW0DVN
ᯘ*DWHZD\
ᯘ'166HUYHU
6LPSOHVHWWLQJ:36EXWWRQPRGH
6HWWLQJ$GKRFQHWZRUN
ᯙ1H[W
ᰙ3UHYLRXV
᰿([LW
Wireless Connection
(QWHU
ᰙ3UHYLRXV
6HWWLQJIURPWKH$3OLVW
᰿([LW
Wired Connection
1
MENU
Select NETWORK.
ENTER
Select Network Status.
2
ᯫ
ᯫ
ᯫ
3
62
ENTER
Check the newtwork status.
Setting: Return to the network setting menu or wireless network setting
type menu.
Test: Test the current network status
after setting the network.
Close: Return to the previous menu.
WATCHING TV / CHANNEL CONTROL
REMOTE CONTROL FUNCTIONS
When using the remote control, aim it at the remote control sensor on the TV.
The remote control may differ from the images below.
Turns the TV on from standby or off to
standby.
LIGHT
Illuminates the remote control buttons.
(Except 32/42/46/52/60LD550,
47/55LD650)
ENERGY SAVING
Adjusts the Energy Saving setting.
AV MODE
ENERGY AV MODE INPUT
TV
SAVING
1
INPUT
2 ABC 3 DEF
4 GHI 5 JKL 6 MNO
TV
7PQRS 8 TUV 9 WXYZ
LIST
0
RATIO
DELETE
— (DASH)
CH
P
A
G
E
MUTE
MENU
Rotates through inputs.
Also switches the TV on from standby.
Returns to the last TV channel.
ENERGY AV MODE INPUT
TV
SAVING
1
Q.MENU
LIST
FLASHBK
2 ABC 3 DEF
4 GHI 5 JKL 6 MNO
7PQRS 8 TUV 9 WXYZ
LIST
FAV
VOL
Toggles through preset Video and
Audio modes. Źp.88
NUMBER button
FLASHBK
MARK
CHAR/NUM
LIGHT
Źp.132
Used to enter a program number for
multiple program channels such as 2-1,
2-2, etc.
Displays the channel table.
0
FLASHBK
MARK
FAV
VOL
CHAR/NUM
3D
DELETE
CH
MUTE
MENU
P
A
G
E
WATCHING TV / CHANNEL CONTROL
LIGHT
POWER
Q.MENU
Tunes to the last channel viewed.
ENTER
ENTER
VOLUME UP/
DOWN
Adjusts the volume.
BACK WIDGETS EXIT
BACK WIDGETS EXIT
FAV
Set up desired favorite channels list.
MARK
Select the input to apply the Picture
Wizard settings. Źp.131
Use to mark or unmark a photo/music/
movie. Źp.105, 110, 116
RATIO
Changes the aspect ratio.
3D
CHAR/NUM
MUTE
DELETE
Źp.128
Used for viewing the 3D video.
Źp.94
Shifts the Character or Number for
internet service.
Switches the sound on or off.
Deleted the character or number on the
screen.
CHANNEL
UP/DOWN
Changes the channel.
PAGE
UP/DOWN
Moves from one full set of screen information to the next one.
63
WATCHING TV / CHANNEL CONTROL
MENU
MUTE
MENU
Q.MENU
ENTER
Displays the main menu or clears all
on-screen displays and return to TV
viewing.
NETCAST
Select the desired NETCAST menu
source. Źp.123
Q.MENU
Opens the list of Quick Menu options.
DELETE
MUTE
MENU
Q.MENU
ENTER
Źp.71
WATCHING TV / CHANNEL CONTROL
BACK WIDGETS EXIT
THUMBSTICK
(Up/Down/Left
Right/ENTER)
Navigates the on-screen menus and
adjusts the system settings to your
preference.
BACK
Allows the user to move return one step
in an interactive application or other
user interaction function.
WIDGETS
WIDGETS for showing or hiding the
Yahoo! Dock and accessing the Yahoo!
TV Widgets user experience.
INFO
Displays channel information at the
bottom of the screen. Źp.81
EXIT
Clears all on-screen displays and return
to TV viewing.
COLOR
BUTTON
Access special functions in some
menus.
FREEZE
MUTE
MENU
Q.MENU
ENTER
BACK INFO
EXIT
FREEZE
L/R SELECT
ţ Controls MY MEDIA menu (Movie List,
Photo List, Music List)
ţ Controls the SIMPLINK compatible
devices.
FREEZE
Pause the present picture at the screen.
(It doesn’t work at USB Mode and
Simplink.)
The TV returns to normal viewing automatically if no signal is received or no
operation is performed for 5 minutes.
If you keep the screen in Freeze condition, the residual image can exist.
(For Plasma TV)
FREEZE
SIMPLINK
See a list of AV devices connected to
TV.
When you toggle this button, the
SIMPLINK menu appears at the screen.
Źp.90
RATIO
64
Changes the aspect ratio.
L/R SELECT
MUTE
MENU
Q.MENU
ENTER
BACK INFO
EXIT
L/R SELECT
Źp.95
USB,
SIMPLINK
Control buttons
FREEZE
INFO
Used for viewing the 3D video.
BACK WIDGETS EXIT
Źp.128
L/R SELECT
INFO
RATIO
L/R SELECT
RATIO
Simple Remote Control (For 42/47/55LE7500, 47/55LE8500)
POWER
VOL
TV/INPUT
CH
TV/INPUT
VOLUME UP/
DOWN
MUTE
CHANNEL
UP/DOWN
Rotates through inputs.
Also switches the TV on from standby.
Źp.83
Adjusts the volume.
Switches the sound on or off.
Źp.66
Changes the channel.
NUMBER button
FLASHBK
— (DASH)
Used to enter a program number for multiple program
channels such as 2-1, 2-2, etc.
FLASHBK
Tunes to the last channel viewed.
WATCHING TV / CHANNEL CONTROL
POWER
Turns the TV on from standby or off to standby.
Installing Batteries
ᯫ
ᯫ
ᯫ
Open the battery compartment cover
on the back side and install the batteries matching correct polarity.
Install two 1.5V AAA batteries. Don’t
mix old or used batteries with new
ones.
Close cover.
Installing Batteries
ᯫ
ᯫ
ᯫ
Open the battery compartment cover
on the back side and install the batteries matching correct polarity.
Install two 1.5V AAA batteries. Don’t
mix old or used batteries with new
ones.
Close cover.
65
WATCHING TV / CHANNEL CONTROL
TURNING ON THE TV
1
First, connect power cord correctly.
At this moment, the TV switches to standby mode.
ᯫ
In standby mode to turn TV on, press the / I, INPUT, CH (ᰜor ᰝ) button on the TV or press
the , INPUT, CH (ᰜor ᰝ), Number (0-9) button on the remote control.
WATCHING TV / CHANNEL CONTROL
2
Select the viewing source by using the INPUT button on the remote control.
3
When finished using the TV, press the POWER button on the remote control. The TV reverts
to standby mode.
! NOTE
Ź If you intend to be away on vacation, disconnect the power plug from the wall power outlet.
Ź If you do not complete the Initial setting, it will appear whenever the TV is switched on until the
Initial setting procedure is completed.
CHANNEL SELECTION
1
Press the CH (ᰜor ᰝ) or NUMBER buttons to select a channel number.
VOLUME ADJUSTMENT
Adjust the volume to suit your personal preference.
66
1
Press the VOL (+ or -) button to adjust the volume.
2
If you want to switch the sound off, press the MUTE button.
3
You can cancel the Mute function by pressing the MUTE or VOL (+ or -) button.
INITIAL SETTING
This Function guides the user to easily set the essential items for viewing the TV for the first time
when purchasing the TV. It will be displayed on the screen when turning the TV on for the first time. It
can also be activated from the user menus.
ᯫ
ᯫ
Step 1. Selecting Language
1
:(/&20(
Select Menu Language.
7KDQN\RXIRUFKRRVLQJ/*
6WHS/DQJXDJH
2
(QJOLVK
ENTER
WATCHING TV / CHANNEL CONTROL
ᯫ
Default selection is “Home Use”. We recommend setting the TV to “Home Use” mode for the best
picture in your home environment.
“Store Demo” Mode is only intended for use in retail environments. Customers can adjust the
“Picture menu - Picture mode” manually while inspecting the TV, but the TV will automatically
return to preset in-store mode after 5 minutes.
“Store Demo” Mode is an optimal setting for displaying at stores. “Store Demo” mode initializes
the TV to set the image quality.
(VSD"O
)UDQ«DLV
䭢⍴㮻
ᯙ1H[W
Step 2. Mode setting
6WHS0RGH6HWWLQJ
L 6HOHFWLQJWKHHQYLURQPHQW
&KRRVHWKHVHWWLQJPRGH\RXZDQW
6HOHFW>+RPH8VH@ZKHQVHWWLQJ79XS
LQKRPH<RXFDQDGMXVWSLFWXUHTXDOLW\
DFFRUGLQJO\WKURXJK3LFWXUH0RGHPHQX
RSWLRQ
+RPH8VH
ؒ 'HPR0RGH
ᰙ3UHYLRXV
1
2
Select Home Use.
ENTER
6WRUH'HPR
2II
ᯙ1H[W
For 42/47LE5350, 42/47/55LE5400,
42/47/55LE5500, 42/47/55LE7500,
47/55LE8500, 42/47/55LX6500
67
WATCHING TV / CHANNEL CONTROL
Step 3. Power Indicator (For LED LCD TV)
1
6WHS3RZHU,QGLFDWRU
6WDQGE\/LJKW
Select On or Off.
‫܁‬2II‫۽‬
WATCHING TV / CHANNEL CONTROL
2
ᰙ3UHYLRXV
ᯙ1H[W
ᯫ
ENTER
This function is disable in “Step2. Mode
Setting - Store Demo”.
Step 4. Time Zone
1
Select Time Zone option.
6WHS7LPH=RQH
7LPH=RQH
‫(܁‬DVWHUQ‫۽‬
'D\OLJKW6DYLQJ
$XWR
ᰙ3UHYLRXV
2
Select Daylight Saving
option.
ᯙ1H[W
3
ENTER
Step 5. Auto Tuning
6WHS$XWR7XQLQJ
1
%HIRUHVWDUWLQJ
EHVXUHWKDWWKH
79DQWHQQDLVFRQQHFWHG
ᰙ3UHYLRXV
68
ᯙ1H[W
ENTER
Check your antenna connection and
start Auto Tuning.
ON-SCREEN MENUS SELECTION
Your TV's OSD (On Screen Display) may differ slightly from that shown in this manual.
1
Display each menu.
ENTER
Select a menu item.
&+$11(/
&+$11(/
4
Accept the current selection.
Return to TV viewing.
EXIT
3,&785(
ᯒ0RYHᯙ(QWHU
ؒ $XWR7XQLQJ
ؒ $VSHFW5DWLR
ؒ 0DQXDO7XQLQJ
ؒ 3LFWXUH:L]DUG
ؒ &KDQQHO(GLW
2II
ؒ &OHDU9RLFH,,
2IIᰕ
ؒ %DODQFH
ؒ 3LFWXUH0RGH
6WDQGDUG
ؒ%DFNOLJKW
ؒ&RQWUDVW
ؒ%ULJKWQHVV
ؒ6K
6KDUSQ
6K
S HVV
HVV
7,0(
ᯒ0RYHᯙ(QWHU
ؒ $XWR9ROXPH
ᯒ0RYHᯙ(QWHU
ؒ ᰚ(QHUJ\6DYLQJ 2II
3,&785(
$8',2
$8',2
ENTER
ᯒ0RYHᯙ(QWHU
ؒ &ORFN
ؒ 6RXQG0RGH
6WDQGDUG
ؒ,QILQLWH6RXQG2II
ؒ7UHEOH
ؒ%DVV
ؒ5H
5 VHWW
5
5H
/
5
7,0(
ؒ 2II7LPH
2II
ؒ 2Q7,PH
2II
ؒ 6OHHS7LPHU
2II
WATCHING TV / CHANNEL CONTROL
2
3
MENU
For USA
/2&.
237,21
ᯒ0RYHᯙ(QWHU
ؒ 6HW3DVVZRUG
/2&.
ᯒ0RYHᯙ(QWHU
ؒ /DQJXDJH
ؒ /RFN6\VWHP
2Q
ؒ &DSWLRQ
ؒ%ORFN&KDQQHO
ؒ 3RZHU,QGLFDWRU
ؒ0RYLH5DWLQJ
ؒ795DWLQJ&KLOGUHQ
ؒ 6HW,'
ؒ795DWLQJ*HQHUDO
ؒ 0RGH6HWWLQJ
+RPH8VH
ؒ'RZQORDGDEOH5DWLQJ
ؒ ,5%ODVWHU
2II
ؒ,QSX
,QS
S W%O
%ORFNN
%O
For Canada
ؒ /RFN6\VWHP
2Q
ؒ%ORFN&KDQQHO
ؒ795DWLQJ(QJOLVK
ؒ795DWLQJ)UHQFK
ؒ'RZQORDGDEOH5DWLQJ
ؒ,QSXW%ORFN
ؒ .H\/RFN
2II
ؒ ,QLWLDO6HWWLQJ
237,21
ᯫ
ؒ 6HW3DVVZRUG
2II
For further information, refer to the
optional “Wireless Media Box”
manual for operating instructions.
! NOTE
Ź ISM Method: For Plasma TV.
Ź Backlight, TruMotion, LED Local Dimming,
Power Indicator: For LED LCD TV/LCD
TV.
69
WATCHING TV / CHANNEL CONTROL
1(7:25.
ᯒ0RYHᯙ(QWHU
ؒ 1HWZRUN6HWWLQJ
1RQH
ؒ 1HWZRUN6WDWXV
1RWFRQQHFWHG
ؒ /HJDO1RWLFH
1(7:25.
WATCHING TV / CHANNEL CONTROL
ؒ (61
,QSXW/LVW
ᯒ0RYH
79
86%
86%
$9
$9
&RPSRQHQW
&RPSRQHQW
5*%3&
+'0,
+'0,
+'0,
+'0,
,1387
ᯕ,QSXW/DEHO
0<0(',$
0<0(',$
0RYLH/LVW
3KRWR/LVW
0XVLF/LVW
*$0(
*$0(
-803
+2/(,121(
:+$&.$02/(
6$9,1*&5<67$/
,19$'(5
85*(176859,9$/
68'2.8
&22.,1*%85*(5
᰿([LW
70
ᰙ([LW
ᯙ(QWHU
QUICK MENU
Your TV's OSD (On Screen Display) may differ slightly from what is shown in this manual.
Q.Menu (Quick Menu) is a menu of features which users might use frequently.
A
ᯙ
᯳Aspect Ratio: Selects your desired picture format.
ᰗPicture Mode: Selects the desired preset picture setting.
ᰘ Sound Mode: Selects the desired preset sound setting.
ᰄ Multi Audio: Changes the audio language (Digital signal).
ᰄ SAP: Selects MTS sound (Analog signal).
᯴Sleep Timer: Select the amount of time before your TV
turns off automatically.
ᰙ([LW
1
2
ᰃ Del/Add: Select channel you want to add or delete.
ᰔCaption: Select on or off.
᯲USB Device: Select “Eject” in order to eject a USB device.
Q.MENU
Display each menu.
ENTER
Make appropriate adjustments.
3
EXIT
WATCHING TV / CHANNEL CONTROL
‫܁‬$VSHFW5DWLR‫۽‬
Return to TV viewing.
71
WATCHING TV / CHANNEL CONTROL
CUSTOMER SUPPORT
Software Update
WATCHING TV / CHANNEL CONTROL
You can update the TV with the latest software to enhance the product operation and/or add new features.
You can update the software by connecting the TV directly to the software update server.
The Software Update function may not work properly depending on your internet environment. In this
case, you can obtain the latest software from the authorized LG Electronics Service Center then update
your TV.
ᯡ6RIWZDUH8SGDWH
۳3LFWXUH7HVW
6RIWZDUH8SGDWH
۳6RXQG7HVW
۳3URGXFW6HUYLFH,QIR
۳1HWZRUN7HVW
&KHFN8SGDWH9HUVLRQ
&ORVH
1
2
3
MENU
RED
Select Customer Support.
ENTER
Select Software Update.
&ORVH
ᯫ
ᯫ
ENTER
Select Check Update Version to check
the newest version.
When selecting “Software Update-On”
- If the TV is connected to the internet
and it finds a software update on the
LG server, the update popup menu will
appear automatically.
- If the updated digital software information is transmitted, the update popup
menu will appear automatically.
ᯫ
ᯫ
ᯫ
ᯫ
ᯫ
ᯫ
ᯫ
ᯫ
72
2Q
ؒ&XUUHQW9HUVLRQ
The software downloading time will
vary depending on the software size
and network conditions.
During the software update procedure, do not turn off the TV or disconnect AC power, or disconnect the
LAN cable.
After software update, you can confirm the update software version at
software Update menu.
When update is completed, the TV
will restart automatically in 5 seconds.
The TV functions may be improved
or changed by software update.
The available time or functionality of
NetCast menu may be depends on
your ISP network conditions.
When an update is completed, some
CHANNEL, PICTURE, and AUDIO
menu settings may need resetting.
This TV cannot be updated to previous software version.
Use the “Check Update Version” button to update the latest software on
the Network server manually.
You cannot open NetCast while the
software is being updated.
Picture Test/Sound Test
This function is a customer support function that can execute picture and sound tests.
۳6RXQG7HVW
" 'R\RXKDYHDSUREOHPLQWKLVWHVW
VFUHHQ"
۳3URGXFW6HUYLFH,QIR
۳1HWZRUN7HVW
<HV
1R
&ORVH
۳6RIWZDUH8SGDWH
۳3LFWXUH7HVW
ᯡ6RXQG7HVW
" 'R\RXKDYHDVRXQGSUREOHPLQWKLV
VFUHHQ"
۳3URGXFW6HUYLFH,QIR
۳1HWZRUN7HVW
&ORVH
1
MENU
2
RED
Select Customer Support.
ENTER
Select Picture Test or Sound Test.
ENTER
Select Yes.
3
4
BACK
EXIT
<HV
1R
WATCHING TV / CHANNEL CONTROL
۳6RIWZDUH8SGDWH
ᯡ3LFWXUH7HVW
Return to the previous menu.
Return to TV viewing.
73
WATCHING TV / CHANNEL CONTROL
Product/Service Info.
This function shows support and product information.
Customer Service Center can differ by country.
WATCHING TV / CHANNEL CONTROL
1
MENU
2
3
BACK
EXIT
RED
Select Customer Support.
ENTER
Select Product/Service Info..
You can check the various
product/Service infomation
based on your model.
Return to the previous menu.
Return to TV viewing.
Network Test
Check the newtwork status.
1HWZRUN6WDWXV
۳6RIWZDUH8SGDWH
۳3LFWXUH7HVW
79
۳6RXQG7HVW
1HWZRUNFRQQHFWLQJ
۳3URGXFW6HUYLFH,QIR
ᯡ1HWZRUN7HVW
&ORVH
6HWWLQJ
1
MENU
2
3
74
ENTER
RED
Select Customer Support.
ENTER
Select Network Test.
Check the newtwork status.
7HVW
&ORVH
SIMPLE MANUAL
You can easily and effectively access the TV information by viewing a simple manual on the TV.
During the Simple Manual operation, audio will be muted.
MENU
2
GREEN
Select Simple Manual.
Select the part of the manual you would like to see.
RED
BLUE
3
EXIT
Go to the Index page.
Play the Simple Manual automatically or manually.
Return to TV viewing.
WATCHING TV / CHANNEL CONTROL
1
75
WATCHING TV / CHANNEL CONTROL
CHANNEL SETUP
Auto Scan (Auto Tuning)
WATCHING TV / CHANNEL CONTROL
Automatically finds all channels available through antenna or cable inputs, and stores them in memory
on the channel list.
Run this function if you change your residence or move the TV.
Auto Tuning memorizes only the channels available at the time.
&+$11(/
ؒ $XWR7XQLQJ
ᯙ
ᯱ
&+$11(/
ؒ $XWR7XQLQJ
ؒ 0DQXDO7XQLQJ
ؒ 0DQXDO7XQLQJ
ؒ &KDQQHO(GLW
ؒ &KDQQHO(GLW
ᯒ0RYHᯙ(QWHU
$QWHQQD
&DEOH
&KHFN\RXUDQWHQQDFRQQHFWLRQ
7KHSUHYLRXVFKDQQHOLQIRUPDWLRQ
ZLOOEHXSGDWHGGXULQJ$XWR7XQLQJ
6WDUW
&ORVH
1
2
MENU
Select CHANNEL.
ENTER
Select Auto Tuning.
ENTER
Select Start.
3
4
ᯫ
ᯫ
ᯫ
ENTER
5
BACK
EXIT
76
ᯒ0RYHᯙ(QWHU
Run Auto tuning.
Return to the previous menu.
Return to TV viewing.
The TV will ask for a password if
parental control has been activated
(LOCK Menu). Use the password you
set up in the LOCK Menu to allow a
channel search.
The maximum number of channels
the TV can store is 1000.
Found channels are grouped in the
order of DTV, TV, Cable DTV and
Cable TV.
Add/Delete Channel (Manual Tuning)
When selecting DTV or Cable DTV input signal in Manual Tuning, you can view the on-screen signal
strength monitor to see the quality of the signal being received.
ᯒ0RYHᯙ(QWHU
ؒ $XWR7XQLQJ
ؒ 0DQXDO7XQLQJ
&+$11(/
ؒ $XWR7XQLQJ
ᯙ
ᯐ
ؒ &KDQQHO(GLW
ؒ 0DQXDO7XQLQJ
ؒ &KDQQHO(GLW
ᯒ0RYHᯙ(QWHU
‫'܁‬79‫۽‬
6HOHFWFKDQQHOW\SHDQG5)FKDQQHO
QXPEHU
&KDQQHO
'79
ؒ6LJQDO6WUHQJWK
ؒ6LJQDO4XDOLW\
'HOHWH
&ORVH
1
2
MENU
Select CHANNEL.
ENTER
Select Manual Tuning.
ENTER
Select DTV, TV, Cable DTV,
or Cable TV.
ᯫ
ᯫ
3
4
WATCHING TV / CHANNEL CONTROL
&+$11(/
The TV will ask for a password if
parental control has been activated
(LOCK Menu). Use the password you
set up in the LOCK Menu to allow a
channel search.
The maximum number of channels
the TV can store is 1000.
Select channel you want to
add or delete.
5
ENTER
6
BACK
EXIT
Select Add or Delete.
Return to the previous menu.
Return to TV viewing.
77
WATCHING TV / CHANNEL CONTROL
Channel Editing
The channels in the Channel Edit List are displayed in black and the channels deleted from the Channel
Edit List are displayed in blue.
WATCHING TV / CHANNEL CONTROL
When a channel number is deleted, it means that you will be unable to select it using CH‫هن‬button
during TV viewing. If you wish to select the deleted channel, directly enter the channel number with the
NUMBER buttons or select it in the Channel Edit menu.
ؒ &KDQQHO(GLW
Select CHANNEL.
ENTER
Select Channel Edit.
ENTER
Select a channel.
4
BLUE
YELLOW
ENTER
CH
P
A
G
E
5
BACK
EXIT
Add or delete a channel.
Block or unblock the channel.
You can block/unblock channels even if
you select “Lock system-Off” in the LOCK
menu.
Switch to the chosen channel number.
Move the pages when the channel list is
too long.
Return to the previous menu.
Return to TV viewing.
$
79
3DJH
&DEOH'79
&DEOH79
5-1
7-1
ᯰ
ᯙ
MENU
3
'79
3-1
ؒ 0DQXDO7XQLQJ
1
)DYRULWH*URXS
ᯒ0RYHᯙ(QWHU
ؒ $XWR7XQLQJ
2
78
&KDQQHO(GLW
&+$11(/
ᯙ&+&KDQJH
᱆)DYRULWH&K
ᯒ1DYLJDWLRQ
᱇3DJH&KDQJH
ᯫ
ᱭ)DYRULWH&K*URXS
ᰙ3UHYLRXV
ᯕ%ORFN8QEORFN
ᯕ$GG'HOHWH
Keep pressing the ᰜbutton and use
the or ! buttons to move between
DTV, TV, Cable DTV and Cable TV.
FAVORITE CHANNEL SETUP
Favorite Channels are a convenient feature that lets you quickly select channels of your choice without
waiting for the TV to select all the in-between channels.
‫܁‬
DTV
DTV
ᰙ([LW
1
P
A
G
E
CH
ᯚᯛ)DYRULWH&K*URXS
‫۽‬
*URXS $
or
1
2 ABC 3 DEF
4 GHI 5 JKL 6 MNO
7PQRS 8 TUV 9 WXYZ
Select your desired channel.
0
2
MARK
FAV
CHAR/NUM
ᯙ
Select your desired favorite
channel group from A to D.
ᯱ
3
YELLOW
BLUE
4
ᯕ&K5HJ
ᯕ&K(GLW
Go to the “CHANNEL menu - Channel
Edit”.
Return to TV viewing.
EXIT
ᯫ
Register or cancel the current channel
in favorite channel list.
You can also setup Favorite List in the
CHANNEL menu - Channel Edit.
WATCHING TV / CHANNEL CONTROL
)DYRULWH/LVW
FAVORITE CHANNEL LIST
Displaying the favorite channel list
)DYRULWH/LVW
‫܁‬
DTV
DTV
ᰙ([LW
ᯚᯛ)DYRULWH&K*URXS
‫۽‬
*URXS $
ᯙ
ᯱ
1
MARK
FAV
Selecting a channel in the favorite
channel list
1
2
ᯕ&K5HJ
Display the Favorite channel list.
CHAR/NUM
Select a channel.
ENTER
Switch to the chosen channel number.
ᯕ&K(GLW
Paging through a favorite channel
list
1
CH
2
EXIT
P
A
G
E
Turn the pages.
Return to TV viewing.
79
WATCHING TV / CHANNEL CONTROL
CHANNEL LIST
You can check which channels are stored in the memory by displaying the channel list.
&KDQQHO/LVW
ᰙ([LW
WATCHING TV / CHANNEL CONTROL
DTV
ᯢ
DTV
ᯙ
ᯱ
This padlock is displayed
when the channel is locked
with parental control.
ᯕ&K(GLW
Displaying Channel List
1
Display the Channel List.
LIST
BLUE
Tune to the “CHANNEL menu - Channel Edit”.
Selecting a channel in the channel list
1
2
Select a channel.
ENTER
Switch to the chosen channel number.
Paging through a channel list
1
CH
2
EXIT
80
P
A
G
E
Turn the pages.
Return to TV viewing.
CHANNEL INFORMATION
᯦'79&11
ᯐ&K&KDQJH‫۽‬1H[Wᯙ:DWFK
$0
$0 ᯵0XOWLOLQJXDO᯸᯿&DSWLRQᰇLᯢ793*'/69
1RLQIRUPDWLRQ
6DUDK%UDGOH\6WHYH*UD\DQG%UHQGRQ3RQJLDSUHVHQWWKHODWHVWLQIDVKLRQWKHDUWVHQWHUWDLQPHQWOLIHVW\OHDQGFRRNLQJ
ZLWKUHJXODUDQGVSHFLDOJXHVWV
6DUDK%UDGOH\6WHYH*UD\DQG%UHQGRQ3RQJLDSUHVHQWWKHODWHVWLQIDVKLRQWKHDUWVHQWHUWDLQPHQWOLIHVW\OHDQGFRRNLQJ
ᯱ
Displaying Channel Information
1
INFO
2
Show the current channel program Information on the screen.
Show a previous or next channel’s program information
3
EXIT
ᯕ8S
ᯕ'RZQ
WATCHING TV / CHANNEL CONTROL
%ULHI,QIR7LWOH7HVW
Return to TV viewing.
81
WATCHING TV / CHANNEL CONTROL
CHANNEL BRIEF INFORMATION
Brief Info shows the present screen information.
1
WATCHING TV / CHANNEL CONTROL
2
ENTER
Shows the current channel’s brief info screen.
ENTER
Return to TV viewing.
6
᯦'79
1
4
&11
5
%ULHI,QIR7LWOH7HVW
$0
ᱏ᯻
$0 ᯵0XOWLOLQJXDO᯸᯿&DSWLRQᰇLᯢ793*'/69
1H[W$01HZV
᯵
᯿
Caption : The program contains one or more caption services.
Use the Q.MENU menu to select wanted Closed caption.
᯸
Dolby Digital: The program contains a Dolby Digital audio
signal in TV and HDMI input source.
ᰆ
The original aspect ratio of the video is 4:3
ᰇ
The original aspect ratio of the video is 16:9 (wide)
ᯢ
2
6XQ)HE$0
Multilingual : The program contains two or more audio services. Use the Q.MENU menu to select wanted Audio.
480i
480p
720p
1080i
1080p
82
3
1
Program title
2
Day, Month, Year,
Present time
3
Program start time
4
Program progress
bar
5
The
The
The
The
The
video
video
video
video
video
resolution
resolution
resolution
resolution
resolution
is
is
is
is
is
720x480i
720x480p
1280x720p
1920x1080i
1920x1080p
V-Chip: The program contains V-Chip information. Refer to
the LOCK menu: A (Age), D (Dialogue), L (Language), S (Sex),
V (Violence), FV (Fantasy Violence)
Program finish
time
6
Banner information
INPUT LIST
Only these input signals which are connected to a TV can be activated and selected.
,QSXW/LVW
ᯒ0RYH
86%
86%
$9
$9
&RPSRQHQW
&RPSRQHQW
5*%3&
+'0,
+'0,
+'0,
+'0,
INPUT
ENTER
ᯫ
ᯫ
ᯫ
ᯫ
ᯫ
ᯫ
ᯫ
ᯫ
Disconnected inputs are inactive
(grayed out)
ᰙ([LW
Select the desired input source.
ᯫ You can also select the desired input source in the INPUT menu.
When new external device is connected, this popup
menu is displayed automatically.
If selecting Yes, you can select input source that you
want to appreciate.
But, when selecting “SIMPLINK - On”, popup menu for
HDMI input will not be displayed.
$9
WATCHING TV / CHANNEL CONTROL
79
ᯕ,QSXW/DEHO
1
ᯙ(QWHU
1HZH[WHUQDOLQSXWLVFRQQHFWHG
'R\RXZDQWWRXVHWKLV"
<HV
1R
TV: Select it to watch over-the-air, cable and digital cable broadcasts.
USB: Select it to use movie, photo, or music files.
AV: Select them to watch a VCR or other external equipment.
Component: Select them to watch DVD or a Digital set-top box.
RGB-PC: Select it to view PC input.
HDMI: Select them to watch high definition devices.
83
WATCHING TV / CHANNEL CONTROL
INPUT LABEL
This indicates which device is connected to which input port.
WATCHING TV / CHANNEL CONTROL
ie) Change the input label using
Blue button
$9
‫܁‬
$9
‫܁‬
‫۽‬
&RPSRQHQW
‫܁‬
‫۽‬
&RPSRQHQW
‫܁‬
‫۽‬
5*%3&
‫܁‬
‫۽‬
9&5
ᯒ0RYH
79
86%
86%
$9
$9
&RPSRQHQW
&RPSRQHQW
5*%3&
+'0,
+'0,
+'0,
+'0,
&ORVH
ᯕ,QSXW/DEHO
INPUT
2
BLUE
3
BACK
EXIT
ᯙ(QWHU
‫۽‬
ᯝ
1
84
,QSXW/LVW
,QSXW/DEHO
Select the desired input
source.
Select the label.
Return to the previous menu.
Return to TV viewing.
ᰙ([LW
RESET TO FACTORY DEFAULT (INITIAL SETTING)
This function resets the TV to factory default and erases all stored channels.
ᯒ0RYHᯙ(QWHU
ؒ /DQJXDJH
ؒ &DSWLRQ
ؒ &DSWLRQ
ᯙ
ᯐ
ؒ ,QLWLDO6HWWLQJ
ؒ 6HW,'
ؒ 6HW,'
ؒ 0RGH6HWWLQJ
+RPH8VH
ؒ 0RGH6HWWLQJ
+RPH8VH
MENU
Select OPTION.
ᯫ
ENTER
Select Initial Setting.
ᯫ
ENTER
Select Yes.
3
4
2II
ؒ 3RZHU,QGLFDWRU
ؒ ,QLWLDO6HWWLQJ
2
ᯒ0RYHᯙ(QWHU
ؒ /DQJXDJH
2II
ؒ 3RZHU,QGLFDWRU
1
237,21
ENTER
$OOXVHUVHWWLQJVDQGFKDQQHOVHWWLQJVZLOO
EHUHVHW6WLOOFRQWLQXH"
<HV
1R
When selecting “Lock System - On”
in the LOCK menu, the message to
enter the password appears.
If you forget your password, press
“0-3-2-5” on the remote control.
WATCHING TV / CHANNEL CONTROL
237,21
TV turns off automatically and starts
factory reset.
85
WATCHING TV / CHANNEL CONTROL
MODE SETTING
Default selection is “Home Use”. We recommend setting the TV to “Home Use” mode for the best
picture in your home environment.
WATCHING TV / CHANNEL CONTROL
237,21
ؒ /DQJXDJH
ؒ &DSWLRQ
237,21
ᯒ0RYHᯙ(QWHU
ؒ /DQJXDJH
2II
ؒ &DSWLRQ
ؒ 3RZHU,QGLFDWRU
L 6HOHFWLQJWKHHQYLURQPHQW
&KRRVHWKHVHWWLQJPRGH\RXZDQW
2II
ؒ 3RZHU,QGLFDWRU
ؒ ,QLWLDO6HWWLQJ
ؒ ,QLWLDO6HWWLQJ
ؒ 6HW,'
ؒ 0RGH6HWWLQJ
+RPH8VH
ᯰ
ᯙ
ؒ 6HW,'
ؒ 0RGH6HWWLQJ
+RPH8VH
6HOHFW>+RPH8VH@ZKHQVHWWLQJ79XS
LQKRPH<RXFDQDGMXVWSLFWXUHTXDOLW\
DFFRUGLQJO\WKURXJK3LFWXUH0RGHPHQX
RSWLRQ
+RPH8VH
6WRUH'HPR
ؒ 'HPR0RGH
2II
&ORVH
For 42/47LE5350,
42/47/55LE5400,
42/47/55LE5500,
42/47/55LE7500,
47/55LE8500,
42/47/55LX6500
1
2
ᯫ
MENU
Select OPTION.
ENTER
Select Mode Setting.
ENTER
Select Home Use.
3
4
BACK
EXIT
86
ᯒ0RYHᯙ(QWHU
Return to the previous menu.
Return to TV viewing.
ᯫ
“Store Demo” Mode is only intended
for use in retail environments.
Customers can adjust the “Picture
menu - Picture mode” manually while
inspecting the TV, but the TV will
automatically return to preset instore mode after 5 minutes.
“Store Demo” Mode is an optimal
setting for displaying at stores. “Store
Demo” mode initializes the TV to set
the image quality.
DEMO MODE
Displays a slide show to explain the various feature of this TV.
237,21
ᯒ0RYHᯙ(QWHU
ؒ &DSWLRQ
ᯒ0RYHᯙ(QWHU
ؒ /DQJXDJH
2II
ؒ &DSWLRQ
ؒ 3RZHU,QGLFDWRU
L 6HOHFWLQJWKHHQYLURQPHQW
&KRRVHWKHVHWWLQJPRGH\RXZDQW
2II
ؒ 3RZHU,QGLFDWRU
ؒ ,QLWLDO6HWWLQJ
ؒ ,QLWLDO6HWWLQJ
ؒ 6HW,'
ؒ 0RGH6HWWLQJ
+RPH8VH
ᯰ
ᯙ
6HOHFW>6WRUH'HPR@IRULQVWRUHGVSOD\)RUXVH
LQKRPHVHOHFW>+RPH8VH@
ؒ 6HW,'
ؒ 0RGH6HWWLQJ
6WRUH'HPR
+RPH8VH
6WRUH'HPR
ؒ 'HPR0RGH
2II
&ORVH
1
2
3
MENU
Select OPTION.
ENTER
Select Mode Setting.
ENTER
Select Store Demo.
4
ENTER
5
EXIT
ᯫ
This feature is disabled in “Home Use”.
WATCHING TV / CHANNEL CONTROL
ؒ /DQJXDJH
237,21
Select On.
Return to TV viewing.
After a while, Demo Mode. starts.
If you want to stop the demo, press any
button (Except VOL +, - and MUTE button).
87
WATCHING TV / CHANNEL CONTROL
AV MODE
AV Mode toggles through preset Video and Audio settings.
WATCHING TV / CHANNEL CONTROL
1
AV MODE
2
2II
&LQHPD᯷&LQHPD
*DPH
6SRUW
Press the AV MODE button repeatedly to
select the desired source.
ᯫ
ENTER
ᯫ
ᯫ
ᯫ
ᯫ
ᯫ
88
If you select “Cinema / ᯷ Cinema”
in AV mode, Cinema / ᯷ Cinema
will be selected both for “PICTURE
menu - Picture Mode” and “AUDIO
menu - Sound Mode” respectively.
If you select “Off” in AV mode, the
“Picture Mode” and “Sound Mode”
return to previous selected value.
Off: Disables the AV MODE.
Cinema / ᯷ Cinema: Optimizes
video and audio for watching movies.
Sport: Optimizes video and audio for
watching sports events.
Game: Optimizes video and audio for
playing games.
GAME
Allows you to enjoy the games installed on the TV.
*$0(
-803
+2/(,121(
:+$&.$02/(
6$9,1*&5<67$/
,19$'(5
85*(176859,9$/
68'2.8
&22.,1*%85*(5
᰿([LW
1
2
3
MENU
Select GAME.
ENTER
Select the desired game.
ENTER
Enter the selected game mode.
4
EXIT
WATCHING TV / CHANNEL CONTROL
*$0(
Return to TV viewing.
89
WATCHING TV / CHANNEL CONTROL
SIMPLINK
SIMPLINK allows you to control and play other AV devices connected with HDMI cable without additional cables and settings. This TV may work with devices with HDMI-CEC support, but only devices
with the
logo are fully supported.
SIMPLINK can be turned on and off in the user menus.
WATCHING TV / CHANNEL CONTROL
Display SIMPLINK menu.
‫܁‬2Q‫۽‬
2
:DWFK79
Select On.
',6&
‫۽܁‬
+'''9'5
3
9&5
‫۽܁‬
+'+7
+''5HFRUGHU
ENTER
4
ENTER
6SHDNHU
‫۽܁‬
Select the desired device.
Control connected AV devices.
796SHDNHU
1
2
3
4
5
90
1
ᯙ(QWHUᰙ([LW
TV viewing: Switch to the previous TV
channel regardless of the current
mode.
DISC playback: Select and play discs.
When multiple discs are available, the
disc devices are conveniently displayed
at the bottom of the screen.
VCR playback: Control the connected
VCR.
HDD Recordings playback: Control
recordings stored in HDD.
Audio Out to Home Theater speaker/
Audio Out to TV: Select Home Theater
speaker or TV speaker for Audio Out.
ᯙ(QWHUᰙ([LW
‫܁‬2Q‫۽‬
1
:DWFK79
2
',6&
‫۽܁‬
ŹWhen no device is connected (displayed in gray)
3
9&5
‫۽܁‬
ŹSelected Device
4
5
+'''9'5
+'+7
+''5HFRUGHU
6SHDNHU
‫۽܁‬
796SHDNHU
ŹWhen a device is conected (displayed in bright
color)
SIMPLINK Functions
ᯫ
ᯫ
Direct Play: After connecting AV devices to the TV, you can directly control the devices and play media
without additional settings.
Select AV device: Enables you to select one of the AV devices connected to the TV.
! NOTE
WATCHING TV / CHANNEL CONTROL
Disc playback: Control connected AV devices by pressing the ᰜᰝ!, ENTER, ᰦ, ᰧ, ᰨ, ᰪand ᰩ buttons.
ᯫ Power off all devices: When you power off the TV, all connected devices are turned off.
ᯫ Switch audio-out: Offers an easy way to switch audio-out.
ᯫ Sync Power on: When the equipment with Simplink function connected HDMI terminal starts to play,
The TV will automatically turn on.
Note: To operate SIMPLINK, an High Speed HDMI cable with *CEC function should be used. (*CEC:
Consumer Electronics Control).
(A device, which is connected to the TV through a HDMI cable but does not support SIMPLINK, does
not provide this function)
ᯫ
Ź Connect the HDMI/DVI IN or HDMI IN terminal of the TV to the rear terminal (HDMI terminal) of
the SIMPLINK device with the HDMI cable
Ź When you switch the Input source with the INPUT button on the remote control, the SIMPLINK
device will stop.
Ź When you select a device with home theater functionality, the sound output automatically switches
to the home theater speakers and the TV speakers are turned off.
Ź If a connected SIMPLINK home theater system doesn’t play the audio from the TV, connect the
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT terminal on the back of the TV to the DIGITAL AUDIO IN terminal on the
back of the SIMPLINK device with an OPTICAL cable.
91
3D
3D IMAGING
IMAGING (FOR 42/47/55LX6500)
3D TECHNOLOGY
This TV can display in 3D via 3D broadcasting or when the TV is connected to a compatible device, such
as a Blu-ray 3D Player. You need such a device to watch the TV in 3D. The 3D TV displays two separate
pictures formatted for each eye. The viewer needs to wear 3D glasses in order to see these images in
3D format.
Viewing 3D Imaging
WARNING
3D IMAGING
ŹWhen viewing 3D imaging, watch the TV from
an effective viewing angle and within the appropriate distance. The appropriate angel and
distance are provided on the next page of this
manual. If you exceed this viewing angle or distance, you may not be able to view the 3D imaging. Furthermore, the 3D imaging may not
display if it is viewed while you are lying down.
ŹIf you watch the 3D imaging too closely or for a
long period of time, it may harm your eyesight.
ŹWatching the TV or playing video games that
incorporate 3D imaging with the 3D glasses
for a long period of time can cause drowsiness,
headaches or fatigue to you and/or your eyes. If
you have a headache, or otherwise feel fatigued
or drowsy, stop watching the TV and take a rest.
ŹPregnant woman, seniors, persons with heart
problems or persons who experience frequent
drowsiness should refrain from watching 3D TV.
ŹSome 3D imaging may cause you to duck or
dodge the image displayed in the video. Therefore, it is best if you do not watch 3D TV near
fragile objects or near any objects that can be
knocked over easily.
Ź Please prevent children under the age of 5 from
watching 3D TV. It may affect their vision development.
ŹWarning for photosensitization seizure:
Some viewers may experience a seizure or epilepsy when exposed to certain factors, including
flashing lights or images in TV or video games.
If you or anybody from your family has a history
of epilepsy or seizure, please consult with your
doctor before watching 3D TV.
Also certain symptoms can occur in unspecified conditions without any previous history. If
you experience any of the following symptoms,
immediately stop watching the 3D imaging and
consult a doctor: dizziness or lightheadedness,
visual transition or altered vision, visual or facial
instability, such as eye or muscle twitching, unconscious action, convulsion, loss of conscience,
confusion or disorientation, loss of directional
sense, cramps, or nausea. Parents should monitor their children, including teenagers, for these
symptoms as they may be more sensitive to the
effects of watching 3D TV.
Risk of photosensitization seizure can be reduced with the following actions.
- Take frequent breaks from watching 3D TV.
- For those who have vision that is different in
each eye, they should watch the TV after taking vision correction measures.
- Watch the TV so that your eyes are on the
same level as the 3D screen and refrain from
sitting too closely to the TV
- Do not watch the 3D imaging when tired or
sick, and avoid watching the 3D imaging for a
long period of time.
- Do not wear the 3D glasses for any other purpose than viewing 3D imaging on a 3D TV.
- Some viewers may feel disoriented after
watching 3D TV. Therefore, after you watch
3D TV, take a moment to regain awareness of
your situation before moving.
! NOTE
92
ŹTo watch the TV in 3D, you must put on your
displayed under 3 wavelength fluorescent light
3D glasses. For best results, you should wear
(50 Hz - 60 Hz) or around windows displayLG Brand 3D glasses. The 3D imaging may not
ing natural light. In such instances, it is recomdisplay properly when using another brand of
mended to turn the lights low and/or block the
3D glasses. Please see the 3D glasses manual
sun light with a curtain.
for instructions on how to use the 3D glasses.
ŹIf there is an obstacle between the TV and the
ŹAfter powering on the TV, a few seconds may be
3D glasses, the 3D imaging may not display
needed for your TV to calibrate.
properly.
Ź It may take a moment for you to see the 3D ŹDo not use the TV in close proximity to other
imaging if you look away from the TV and then
electronic equipments and IR equipments.
ŹIn Analog TV, 3D Imaging does not work.
revert your eyes back to the 3D program.
ŹThe TV may flicker slightly if the 3D imaging is
When using 3D Glasses
Ź3D glasses are sold separately. Refer to the 3D glasses manual for operating instructions.
ŹDo not use the 3D glasses to replace your corrective glasses, sunglasses or protective goggles.
ŹDo not store the 3D glasses in hot or cold locations.
ŹDo not drop objects onto the 3D glasses. Do not drop or bend the glasses.
ŹSince the lenses of the 3D glasses are easily scratched, make sure to clean only with a soft cloth.
Shake off any dust before using the cloth since the glasses are easily scratched.
3D IMAGING
CAUTION
3D Imaging viewing range
TV size, viewing angle & other circumstances may change the viewing distance and the angle of view.
Viewing
Distance
TV
2m-7m
(6.5 ft - 22.9 ft)
2m
Viewing
Angle
60 ƕ 60 ƕ
2m
120º (When the viewing distance is 2 m (6.5 ft))
7m
93
3D IMAGING
WATCHING 3D IMAGING
1 Play the video produced in 3D.
Refer to the following for the supported imaging.
Signal
Resolution
720p
1280x720
Horizontal
Vertical
Frequency (kHz) Frequency (Hz)
Top & Bottom, Side by Side
HDMI (V. 1.4 with HDMI 3D)
Frame Packing
45.00
3D IMAGING
1080i
33.75
60
USB
Input
67.50
27.00
24
Top & Bottom, Side by Side,
Checker Board
HDMI (V. 1.4 with HDMI 3D)
Frame Packing
33.75
30
Top & Bottom, Side by Side
Checker Board
33.75
30
Top & Bottom, Side by Side
Checker Board
1920X1080
1080p
1920X1080
DTV
Top & Bottom, Side by Side
Top & Bottom, Side by Side,
Checker Board
Single Frame Sequential
HDMI
Input
1080p
Playable 3D video format
Signal
Playable 3D video format
720p, 1080p
Top & Bottom, Side by Side
Media contents and a player need to support HDMI (V. 1.4 with HDMI 3D) Frame Packing to play in 3D.
Video, which is input as HDMI (V. 1.4 with HDMI 3D) Frame Packing format, is switched into the 3D screen
automatically.
2
ENTER
3D
After selecting the shape as shown in the screen on TV,
wear the 3D glasses.
To turn on 3D Mode, select this icon.
ᯑ0RYHᯙ(QWHU
Top & Bottom
94
᰿([LW
Side by Side
Checker Board
Frame Sequential
3
ENTER
or
L/R SELECT
Select Setting Left/Right.
4
3XWRQ'JODVVHV
6LWPHWHUVIURP79WRHQMR\WKHEHVW'
YLHZ
7RVHOHFWPRUHFRPIRUWDEOHYLHZIRU
\RXFKDQJHWROHIWULJKWLPDJHRIJODVVHV
ZLWKᯕEXWWRQ
ENTER
Select Left/Right or Right/
Left.
Select the screen with 3D
video with better visibility.
ᯕ6HWWLQJ/HIW5LJKW
ᯡ/HIW5LJKW
۳5LJKW/HIW
(QG'9LGHR
'
᰿([LW
ᯕ6HWWLQJ/HIW5LJKW
(QG'9LGHR
'
5
3D
The 3D imaging mode is
changed to the 2D imaging
mode.
3D IMAGING
ᯙ(QWHU
! NOTE
Ź If you select 3D mode, "Power indicator" is turned off automatically.
Ź While watching 3D imaging, you cannot adjust video/audio settings using the menu.
Ź Some menus may not work while watching the TV in 3D.
Ź You can only choose "Standard ‫ ث‬Cinema ‫ ث‬Game"with the AV MODE button on remote control.
AV Mode is set as Standard while playing in 3D.
Ź The 3D imaging mode is disabled automatically when switching DTV channels.
Ź The screen may not be displayed properly if you view 2D DTV images in 3D imaging mode.
Ź3D effect can be seen when 3D Mode is selected appropriately for the 3D input signal supplied
to the TV.
Ź For *mpo files (3D camera files), the 3D imaging mode is enabled automatically.
Ź Energy Saving is disabled while playing in 3D.
NOTES FOR VIEWING 3D IMAGE WITH 3D BROADCASTING (* In Analog TV, 3D Imaging does not work.)
When switching the 2D image display to the
3D image display with the 3D button on the
remote control, the overlapped image may be
displayed.
If the screen is divided into
left/right or top/bottom when
you change the channel
If your eyes are soaring or the screen looks
blurry while viewing 3D images
ᯫ
ᯫ
Disable the 3D imaging mode with the 3D button.
The 3D imaging mode is disabled automatically
if you change the channel.
ᯫ
This channel supports the 3D imaging mode.
Select the 3D imaging type displayed on the
screen by pressing the 3D button on the remote
control.
ᯫ
Press the L/R SELECT button on the remote control and select L/R or R/L, which you find better
for viewing 3D images.
95
MY
MY MEDIA
MEDIA
ENTRY MODE
The My Media menu will open automatically when you insert a USB drive. My Media can also be
accessed by choosing My Media in the user menu.
After choosing the desired type of media, choose a device to open files from. The options are: USB
device, or DLNA*.
* DLNA: Except 42/47LE5350
3OHDVHVHOHFWWKHGHYLFH
86%/DEHO
0<0(',$
86%/DEHO
MY MEDIA
'/1$
0RYLH/LVW
3KRWR/LVW
0XVLF/LVW
ᯙ'HYLFH6HOHFWLRQ
ᯕ6HDUFK
1
2
3
MENU
Select MY MEDIA.
ENTER
Select Movie List, Photo List
or Music List.
ENTER
Select the desired device.
ᯫ
ᰙ3UHYLRXV
This TV can view JPG image files, HD DivX
files and play MP3 audio files.
When removing the USB device
BLUE
4
BACK
Search other network device.
Return to the previous menu.
Select the USB Device menu before
removing the USB device.
1
Q.MENU
2
96
ENTER
Select USB Device.
Select Eject.
CONNECTION METHOD
USB Connection
IN 4
USB IN 1
USB IN 2
1 Connect the USB device to the USB IN jack on the side of TV.
Memory Key
ŹOnly a USB storage device is recognizable.
ŹConnecting a USB storage device through a USB hub is not supported.
ŹA USB storage device which uses its own driver may not be recognized.
ŹThe recognition speed of a USB storage device may depend on each device.
ŹPlease do not turn off the TV or unplug the USB device when the connected USB storage device
is working. When such device is suddenly separated or unplugged, the stored files or the USB
storage device may be damaged.
ŹOnly use a USB storage device which has normal music files, image files, or movie files.
ŹPlease use only a USB storage device which was formatted as a FAT 32 or NTFS file system provided with the Windows operating system. Others may not be recognized.
ŹSome USB storage devices require a power adapter. The power adapter must be connected in
order to be seen by the TV.
ŹIf a device is not recognized by the TV, try a different cable. Excessively long cables are not supported.
ŹSome USB storage devices may not be supported or operate properly.
ŹPlease backup important files because data on USB device could be damaged. Data management
is consumer's responsibility and as a result, the manufacturer does not cover data damage.
ŹIf your USB memory device has multiple partitions, or if you use a USB multi-card reader, you can
use up to 4 partitions or USB memory devices.
ŹFile alignment method of USB storage device is similar to Window XP and file names can be up
to 100 English characters.
ŹThe recommended capacity is 1 TB or less for a USB external hard disk and 32 GB or less for USB
memory.
ŹIf a USB external hard disk with a “Energy Saving” function doesn’t work, turn the hard disk off and
on again to make it work properly. Refer to the user manual of the USB external hard disk.
ŹUSB storage devices below USB 2.0 are supported as well. But they may not work properly in the
movie list.
ŹMaximum of 999 folders or files can be recognized under one folder.
ŹIf there are too many folders and files in one folder, it may not operate properly.
MY MEDIA
Precautions when using the USB device
97
MY MEDIA
DLNA (Except 42/47LE5350)
About DLNA
MY MEDIA
98
This TV can display and play many types of movie, photo and music files from your DLNA server and
has been certified by DLNA for photos.
The Digital Living Network Alliance (DLNA) is a cross-industry organization of consumer electronics,
computing industry and mobile device companies. Digital Living provides consumers with easy sharing
of digital media through a wired or wireless network in the home.
The DLNA certification logo makes it easy to find products that comply with the DLNA Interoperability
Guidelines. This unit complies with DLNA Interoperability Guidelines v1.5. When a PC running DLNA
server software or other DLNA compatible device is connected to this TV, some setting changes of
software or other devices may be required. Please refer to the operating instructions for the software or
device for more information.
Please refer to pages 99 ~ 121 for additional information on supported file types and other instructions.
! NOTE
ŹThe supplied Nero MediaHome 4 Essentials CD-ROM is a customized software edition only for
sharing files and folders to this TV.
ŹThe supplied Nero MediaHome 4 Essentials software does not support following functions:
Transcoding, Remote UI, TV control, Internet services and Apple iTunes
ŹThis manual explains operations with the English version of Nero MediaHome 4 Essentials as
examples. Follow the explanation referring to the actual operations of your language version.
ŹIf there are too many folders and files in one folder, it may not operate properly.
ŹFor the DLNA option, use the Nero MediaHome programme that is provided with the TV. However, we
cannot guarantee that third party program will work perfectly.
ŹYou can select a channel while viewing the small preview channel list on your TV screen.
ŹCheck your network settings when the DLNA option does not work properly.
ŹIf there is an abnormal operation or an error occurs in Nero Media Home, the DLNA option may
not work properly. In this case, exit Nero Media Home and restart the programme. You can download the latest version of Nero Media Home by clicking the question mark at the bottom-left of
the program.
ŹWhen the network is unstable, the device may be slower or may need to load during playback.
ŹWhen playing a video in DLNA mode, the Multi Audio and Closed Caption features are not supported.
ŹWhen selecting Full Screen in DLNA mode, the ratio of the outputted screen may differ from the
original.
ŹWhen more than one TV is connected to a single server in DLNA mode, a file may not play properly,
depending on the server performance.
ŹIf the play time information is not provided by the server, it is displayed as "--:--:--."
ŹWhen using Movie List, DRM files in the DLNA server cannot be played.
ŹDLNA operation may not work properly according to the AP manufacturers.
Installing Nero MediaHome 4 Essentials
Nero MediaHome 4 Essentials is easy to use DLNA server software for Windows.
1
Start up your computer, and insert the Nero MediaHome 4 Essentials CD-ROM into your computer’s CD-ROM drive.
An installation wizard will walk you through the quick and uncomplicated installation process.
2
Close all Microsoft Windows programs and exit any anti-virus software that may be running.
3
Insert the Nero MediaHome 4 Essentials CD-ROM into your computer’s CD-ROM drive.
4
Click Nero MediaHome 4 Essentials. The installation is prepared and the installation wizard appears.
5
Click the Next button to display the serial number input screen.
Click Next to go to the next step.
6
If you accept all conditions, click I accept the License Conditions check box and click Next.
Installation is not possible without this agreement.
7
Click Typical and click Next. The installation process is started.
8
If you want to take part in the anonymous collection of data, select the check box and click the
Next button.
9
Click the Exit button to complete the installation.
MY MEDIA
Requirement PC system before you install Nero MediaHome 4 Essentials
ᯫ Windows® XP (Service Pack 2 or higher), Windows Vista® (no Service Pack required), Windows® XP
Media Center Edition 2005 (Service Pack 2 or higher), Windows Server® 2003
ᯫ Windows Vista® 64-bit edition (application runs in 32-bit mode)
ᯫ Hard drive space: 200 MB hard drive space for a typical installation of Nero MediaHome standalone
ᯫ 1.2 GHz Intel® Pentium® III or AMD Sempron™ 2200+ processors
ᯫ Memory: 256 MB RAM
ᯫ Graphics card with at least 32 MB video memory, minimum resolution of 800 x 600 pixels, and
16-bit color settings
ᯫ Windows® Internet Explorer® 6.0 or higher
ᯫ DirectX® 9.0c revision 30 (August 2006) or higher
ᯫ Network environment: 100 Mb Ethernet, WLAN (IEEE 802.11b/g/n)
99
MY MEDIA
Sharing files and folders
After installing Nero MediaHome, you must add folders you wish to share.
MY MEDIA
1
Double-click the Nero MediaHome 4 Essentials icon on the desktop.
2
Click Network icon on the left and define your network name in the Network name field. The
Network name you enter will be recognized by your TV.
3
Click Shares icon on the left.
4
Click Local Folders tab on the Shared screen.
5
Click Add icon to open the Browse Folder window.
6
Select the folder containing the files you want to share. The selected folder is added to the list of
shared folders.
7
Click Start Server icon to start the server.
! NOTE
ŹIf the shared folders or files are not displayed on the TV, click the folder on the Local Folders
tab and click Rescan Folder at the More button.
ŹVisit www.nero.com for more information and software tools.
100
Playing back shared contents
You can display and play movie, photo and music content stored on your computer or other DLNA
media servers.
1 Start the server on your computer or other device that connected on your home network.
2
3
Select MY MEDIA.
ENTER
Select Movie List, Photo List or Music List.
ENTER
Select the DLNA.
Depending on the media server, this TV may need to get the permission from
the server.
If you want to re-scan available media server, press blue color button.
MY MEDIA
4
MENU
! NOTE
ŹTo play the file on the media server, the TV and the media server must be connected to the
same access point.
ŹBecause the compatibility and available playback functions on the MY MEDIA menu are tested
on the bundle DLNA server (Nero MediaHome 4 Essentials) environment, file requirements and
playback functions on the MY MEDIA may differ depending on media servers.
ŹThe file requirements on this page are not always compatible. There may have some restrictions
by file features and media server’s ability.
ŹEven the files that are not supported can be displayed in photo thumbnail or music thumbnail.
ŹMovie thumbnail is not supported in DLNA Movie.
ŹIf there is an unplayable music file in the MY MEDIA menu, the TV will skip the file and play next
file.
ŹThe file information indicated on the screen may not always correct for music and movie files in
MY MEDIA menu
ŹThis TV only supports movie subtitle files supplied by Nero MediaHome 4.
ŹThe subtitle file name and movie file name have to be the same and located at the same folder.
ŹIf subtitle files have been added after a directory has been indexed already, the user has to
remove and re-add the folder to the list of shares.
ŹThe playback and operating quality of the MY MEDIA function may be affected by your home
network condition.
ŹThe files from removable media such as USB drive, DVD-drive etc. on your media server may
not share properly.
ŹWhen playing the Media through DLNA connection, it does not support the DivX file play which
is protected by DRM.
ŹUp to 200 folders in one folder and 999 including folders and files can be recognized.
ŹIf there are too many folders and files in one folder, it may not operate properly.
101
MY MEDIA
MOVIE LIST
It displays all of the video files it recognizes.
The On-Screen Display on your model may be slightly different.
Supported movie file
ᯫ Resolution: under 1920 pixel (width) x 1080 pixel (height)
ᯫ Frame Rate: under 30 frame/sec (1920x1080), under 60 frame/sec (1280x720)
ᯫ Max bitrate of playable video file: 20 Mbps (Mega bit per second)
ᯫ Bit rate of audio format: within 32 kbps to 320 kbps (MP3)
ᯫ Supported external subtitle format: *.smi/*.srt/*.sub(MicroDVD,Subviewer1.0/2.0)/*.ass/*.ssa/*.
txt(TMPlayer)/*.psb(PowerDivX)
ᯫ Supported Internal subtitle format: only XSUB (It is the subtitle format used in DivX6 files)
MY MEDIA
102
Precautions when playing the video files
ŹSome user-created subtitles may not work properly.
ŹSome special characters are not supported in subtitles.
ŹHTML tags are not supported in subtitles.
ŹTime information in an external subtitle file should be arranged in ascending order to be played.
ŹChanging font and color in subtitles is not supported.
ŹSubtitles in languages other than one specified are not supported.
ŹVideo files with subtitle files of 1 MB or larger may not be played properly.
ŹThe screen may suffer temporary interruptions (image stoppage, faster playback, etc.) when the
audio language is changed.
ŹA damaged video file may not be played correctly, or some functions may not be usable.
ŹVideo files produced with some encoders may not be played correctly.
ŹIf the video and audio structure of recorded file is not interleaved, the file not playback properly.
ŹVideo with resolution higher than maximum resolution supported for each frame, cannot be guaranteed for smooth playback.
ŹVideo files other than the specified types and formats may not work properly.
ŹThe movie file encoded by the GMC (Global Motion Compensation) and Qpel (Quarterpel Motion
Estimation) is not supported.
ŹOnly 10000 sync blocks are supported within the subtitle file.
ŹWe do not guarantee smooth playback of profiles encoded level 4.1 or higher in H.264/AVC.
ŹDTS Audio codec is not supported.
ŹA video file more than 30GB in file size is not supported for playback.
ŹPlaying a video via a USB connection that doesn’t support high speed may not work properly.
ŹUSB storage devices below USB 2.0 are supported as well. But they may not work properly in the
movie list.
ŹThe video file and its subtitle file must be located in the same folder.
At this time, a video file name and its subtitle file name must be identical for it to be displayed.
ŹWhen you are watching a movie via the Movie List function, you can adjust the picture with the
ENERGY SAVING and AV MODE button on the remote control. User setup for each picture mode
is not supported.
ŹTrick Mode does not support other functions than ᰩif video files do not have index information.
ŹWhen playing video file using network, the Trick mode is limited to 2-times speed.
ŹVideo file names that contain special characters may not be playable.
Supported Video Formats
File
Extensions
Audio/
Video
Codec
VC-1 Advanced Profile
Advanced Profile@Level 3
(e.g. 720p60, 1080i60, 1080p30)
VC-1 Simple and Main Profiles
Simple Profile@Medium Level (e.g. CIF, QVGA)
Main Profile@High Level (e.g. 1080p30)
Video
.asf
.wmv
Audio
Profile/Level Support
Explanation
Only streams compliant
to SMPTE 421M VC-1
standard are supported.
WMA Standard
WMA 9 Professional
DivX3.11
Video
.divx
.avi
DivX4
DivX5
DivX6
XViD
.mp4
.m4v
MPEG-1 Layer I, II
MPEG-1 Layer III (MP3)
Dolby Digital
H.264 / AVC
Main Profile@ Level 4.1
High Profile@ Level 4.1
(e.g. 720p60, 1080i60, 1080p30)
MPEG-4 Part 2
Advanced Simple Profile (e.g. 720p/1080i)
AAC
AAC-LC and HE-AAC
Global motion compensation or quarterpel
motion estimation does
not supported. Streams
using this syntax are not
supported.
H.264 / AVC
Main Profile@ Level 4.1
High Profile@ Level 4.1
(e.g. 720p60, 1080i60, 1080p30)
Most of the MKV content available is encoded by the open source
x264 codec.
AAC
AAC-LC and HE-AAC
Video
Audio
Video
.mkv
Audio
Dolby Digital
H.264 / AVC
Main Profile@ Level 4.1
High Profile@ Level 4.1
(e.g. 720p60, 1080i60, 1080p30)
MPEG-2
Main Profile@High Level(e.g. 720p60, 1080i60)
VC-1
Simple Profile@Medium Level
(e.g. CIF, QVGA)
Main Profile@High Level
(e.g. 1080p30)
Advanced Profile@Level3
(e.g. 720p60, 1080i60, 1080p30)
Video
.ts
.trp
.tp
Audio
.vob
.mpg
Only streams compliant
to SMPTE 421M VC-1
standard are supported.
MPEG-1 Layer I, II
MPEG-1 Layer III (MP3)
Dolby Digital
AAC
Video
Main Profile@ Level 4.1
High Profile@ Level 4.1
(e.g. 720p60, 1080i60, 1080p30)
Global motion compensation or quarterpel
motion estimation does
not supported. Streams
using this syntax are not
supported.
MY MEDIA
H.264 / AVC
Audio
Advanced Simple Profile
(e.g. 720p/1080i)
AAC-LC and HE-AAC
MPEG-1
MPEG-2
Audio
Dolby Digital
MPEG-1 Layer I, II
DVD-LPCM
Video
MPEG-1
Audio
MPEG-1 Layer I, II
Main Profile@High Level (e.g. 720p60, 1080i60)
Main Profile@High Level (e.g. 720p60, 1080i60)
Only streams compliant
configured properly for
TS, PS or ES
103
MY MEDIA
Screen Components
1
MENU
2
Select MY MEDIA.
ENTER
ENTER
Select Movie List.
1
1
2
3
MY MEDIA
4
5
Moves to upper level folder
Current page/Total pages
Corresponding buttons on the
remote control
Contents under the folder
focused on 1
Current page/ total pages of
contents
2
3DJH
0RYLH/LVW
'ULYH
86%;7,&.
0
3DJH
0
0
0
%XWWHUIO\B
4
ᯒ0RYHᯙ3OD\᱇3DJH&KDQJH᱅0DUN
Abnormal files are
displayed using this
graphic.
ᯕ&KDQJH'HYLFH
ᯕ7R3KRWR/LVW
ᯕ&KDQJH1XPEHUV
ᯕ0DUN0RGH
᰿([LW
3
Non-supported files
are displayed using
this graphic.
RED
104
Change to a different input.
GREEN
Move to Photo List or Music List.
YELLOW
Change Numbers: Changes the number or thumbnails displayed at a time.
BLUE
Allows you to mark certain files.
EXIT
Return to TV viewing.
5
Movie Selection
3DJH
0RYLH/LVW
1
'ULYH
86%;7,&.
0
0
Select the target folder or drive.
3DJH
0
0
2
%XWWHUIO\B
3
ENTER
ENTER
Select the desired
movie title.
Play the movie file.
ᯒ0RYHᯙ3OD\᱇3DJH&KDQJH᱅0DUN
ᯕ7R3KRWR/LVW
ᯕ&KDQJH1XPEHUV
ᯕ0DUN0RGH
᰿([LW
ᯫ
Use the CH (ᰜᰝ) button to navigate
in the movie page.
Mark Mode
0DUN0RGH
0
Select the target folder or
drive.
3DJH
'ULYH
86%;7,&.
0
1
3DJH
0RYLH/LVW
0
2
0
ENTER
%XWWHUIO\B
3
ᯕ3OD\0DUNHG
RED
ᯕ0DUN$OO
ᯕ8QPDUN$OO
ᯕ([LW0DUN0RGH
Play Marked: Play the first selected file. Once
a movie finishes playing, the next selected
one will be played automatically.
GREEN
Mark All: Mark all files in the folder.
YELLOW
Unmark All: Deselect all marked files.
BLUE
᰿([LW
FAV
4
RED
ᯫ
Select the desired
movie title.
MARK
CHAR/NUM
ᯒ0RYHᯙ0DUN᱇3DJH&KDQJH᱅0DUN
MY MEDIA
ᯕ&KDQJH'HYLFH
Mark your desired movie file.
Play the marked movie file.
It displays the current movie
status progress bar on the bottom of the screen.
When one or more movie files are
marked, the marked movies will be
played in sequence.
Enter or exit the Mark Mode.
105
MY MEDIA
Playing the Movie
&KRRVHRSWLRQV
6HW9LGHR3OD\
6HW9LGHR
6HW$XGLR
6HW'YLGHR
ᰧ
MY MEDIA
1
&ORVH
ᯚᯛ
ᰦ
ᰦ
ᰨ
ᰪ
ᰩ
ᰚ
ᱭ2SWLRQ
ᰙ+LGH
Show the Option menu.
Q.MENU
2
ENTER
Select the desired menu option.
᰿([LW
For 42/47/55LX6500
! NOTE
Ź When replaying a video file after stopping, you can play from where it stopped
automatically.
Ź If you select “Yes” when playing the
same file after the video file has been
stopped, it will restart where it stopped
previously.
Ź If continuous series files exist within the
folder, the next file will automatically be
played. But, this excludes cases when
the Repeat function of Movie List Option
is turned “On” (Refer to page 107) or
when set as Marked Play.
Using the remote control
EXIT
Return to the previous menu.
Select the required speed: x2, x4, x8, x16, x32 (backward/forward).
Pauses the media player.
If no buttons are pressed on the remote control for 10 minutes after pausing, the
TV returns to the playback state.
Displays slow motion.
Move to a specific frame forward or backward while playing a video. A cursor indicating the position can be viewed on the screen. It may not work properly for
some movie files.
Return to normal playback.
BACK
ENERGY
SAVING
Hide the menu on screen. To see the menu again, press ENTER button.
Press the ENERGY SAVING button repeatedly to increase the brightness of your
screen (Refer to p. 132).
AV MODE
Press the AV MODE button repeatedly to select the desired source (Refer to p. 88).
106
Set Video Play Menu Options
6HW9LGHR3OD\
‫܁‬
)XOO
‫۽‬
$XGLR/DQJXDJH
‫܁‬
‫۽‬
6XEWLWOH/DQJXDJH
‫܁‬
2Q
‫۽‬
ؒ/DQJXDJH
‫܁‬
(QJOLVK
‫۽‬
ؒ&RGH3DJH
‫܁‬
'HIDXOW
‫۽‬
ؒ6\QF
‫܁‬
‫۽‬
ؒ3RVLWLRQ
‫܁‬
‫۽‬
ؒ6L]H
‫܁‬
1RUPDO
‫۽‬
5HSHDW
‫܁‬
2II
‫۽‬
ᯫ
ᰙ3UHYLRXV
ᯫ
1
2
Select Picture Size, Audio Language,
Subtitle Language, or Repeat.
ᯫ
Make appropriate adjustments.
ᯫ
Code Page
ᯫ
Subtitle Language Group
Supported Language
Latin1
English, Spanish, French
Korean
English, Korean
ᯫ
ᯫ
ᯫ
ᯫ
Picture Size: Selects your desired
picture format for videos.
Full Mode: Files are played in full
screen mode regardless of the aspect
ratio of video.
Original Mode: Files are played
according to the aspect ratio of
video.
Audio Language: Changes the
Language Group of the audio for
video files. Files with a single audio
track cannot be selected.
Subtitle Language: The subtitles can
be turned on or off.
Language: Activated for SMI subtitles
and can select the language within
the subtitle.
Code Page: Subtitle font selection.
When set to default, contents are
displayed in the language set in
"Option - Language - Menu
Language."
Sync: When the video is not synchronized with the captions, it can be
adjusted by 0.5 second.
Position: Move the location of the
subtitles.
Size: Changes the subtitle font size.
Repeat: Turn on/off repeat function
of movie playback. When turned on,
the file within the folder will be played
back repeatedly. When turned off, if
the next file name is similar to the
previous file, it can be played sequentially.
MY MEDIA
3LFWXUH6L]H
107
MY MEDIA
* Image shown may differ from your TV.
Set Video Menu Options
For LED LCD TV/LCD TV
For Plasma TV
6HW9LGHR
6HW9LGHR
‫܁‬
3LFWXUH0RGH
6WDQGDUG
‫۽‬
‫܁‬
3LFWXUH0RGH
MY MEDIA
ؒ%DFNOLJKW
‫܁‬
‫۽‬
ؒ&RQWUDVW
‫܁‬
‫۽‬
ؒ&RQWUDVW
‫܁‬
‫۽‬
ؒ%ULJKWQHVV
‫܁‬
‫۽‬
ؒ%ULJKWQHVV
‫܁‬
‫۽‬
ؒ6KDUSQHVV
‫܁‬
‫۽‬
ؒ&RORU
‫܁‬
‫۽‬
ؒ&RORU
‫܁‬
‫ ܁‬5
*
‫۽‬
&
‫۽‬
‫۽‬
ؒ'\QDPLF&RQWUDVW
‫܁‬
0HGLXP
‫۽‬
ؒ7LQW
ؒ(GJH(QKDQFHU
‫܁‬
+LJK
‫۽‬
ؒ&RORU7HPS
‫ ܁‬:
ؒ1RLVH5HGXFWLRQ
‫܁‬
0HGLXP
‫۽‬
ؒ1RLVH5HGXFWLRQ
‫܁‬
‫܁‬
/RZ
‫۽‬
7UX0RWLRQ
ᯕ3LFWXUH5HVHW
ᯕ3LFWXUH5HVHW
1
ENTER
BLUE
‫۽‬
6WDQGDUG
/RZ
‫۽‬
ᰙ3UHYLRXV
ᰙ3UHYLRXV
Make appropriate adjustments.
Then, select Previous.
Reset picture settings to default.
Set 3D video Menu Options
(For 42/47/55LX6500)
Set Audio Menu Options
6HW$XGLR
6RXQG0RGH
‫܁‬
6WDQGDUG
‫۽‬
$XWR9ROXPH
‫܁‬
2II
‫۽‬
&OHDU9RLFH,,
‫܁‬
2II
‫۽‬
%DODQFH ‫ ܁‬/
5
3XWRQ'JODVVHV
6LWPHWHUVIURP79WRHQMR\WKHEHVW'
YLHZ
7RVHOHFWPRUHFRPIRUWDEOHYLHZIRU
\RXFKDQJHWROHIWULJKWLPDJHRIJODVVHV
ZLWKᯕEXWWRQ
‫۽‬
ᯙ(QWHU
ᯕ6HWWLQJ/HIW5LJKW
ᰙ3UHYLRXV
1
ENTER
108
Make appropriate adjustments.
Then, select Previous.
(QG'9LGHR
'
3D
For more information, see the 3D
Imaging section in the Owner's
Manual.
PHOTO LIST
The On-Screen Display on your model may be slightly different.
Supported photo file: *.JPG
ᯫ Baseline: 64 pixel (width) x 64 pixel (height) to 15360 pixel (width) x 8640 pixel (height)
ᯫ Progressive: 64 pixel (width) x 64 pixel (height) to 1920 pixel (width) x 1440 pixel (height)
ᯫ You can play JPEG files only.
ᯫ Non-supported files are displayed in the form of predefined icon.
ᯫ An error message occurs for corrupted files or file formats that cannot be played.
ᯫ Corrupted image files may not be displayed properly.
ᯫ It may take some time to view high-resolution images in full screen.
For 42/47/55LX6500
File
Extensions
Item
jpeg
jpg
jpe
2D
photo size
supproted file format
mpo
3D
photo size
SOF0: baseline
SOF1: Extend Sequential
SOF2: Progressive
Min: 64 x 64
Max - Normal Type: 15360 (W) x 8640 (H)
Progressive Type: 1920 (W) x 1440 (H)
mpo
4:3 size: 3648 x 2736
2592 x 1944
2048 x 1536
3:2 size: 3648 x 2432
MY MEDIA
supproted file format
Profile
Screen Components
1
1
MENU
Select MY MEDIA.
3DJH
3KRWR/LVW
86%;7,&.
2
ENTER
ENTER
Select
Photo List.
2
3
3DJH
'ULYH
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
5
3
4
1
2
3
4
5
Moves to upper level folder
Current page/Total pages
Corresponding buttons on the
remote control
Contents under the folder
focused on 1
Current page/total pages of
contents
Abnormal files are
displayed using this
graphic.
Non-supported files
are displayed using
this graphic.
ᯒ0RYHᯙ9LHZ᱇3DJH&KDQJH᱅0DUN
ᯕ&KDQJH'HYLFH
ᯕ7R0XVLF/LVW
ᯕ&KDQJH1XPEHUV
ᯕ0DUN0RGH
᰿([LW
3
RED
Change to a different input.
GREEN
Move to Music List or Movie List.
YELLOW
Change Numbers: Changes the number or
thumbnails displayed at a time.
BLUE
EXIT
Allows you to mark certain files.
Return to TV viewing.
109
MY MEDIA
Photo Selection
1
3DJH
3KRWR/LVW
86%;7,&.
3DJH
'ULYH
2
3
ᯒ0RYHᯙ9LHZ᱇3DJH&KDQJH᱅0DUN
MY MEDIA
ᯕ&KDQJH'HYLFH
ᯕ7R0XVLF/LVW
ᯕ&KDQJH1XPEHUV
Select the target folder or drive.
ᯕ0DUN0RGH
ᯫ
᰿([LW
ENTER
ENTER
Select the desired photos.
Photo file is displayed.
Use the CH (ᰜᰝ) button to navigate
in the photo page.
Mark Mode
1
3DJH
Select the target folder or drive.
3KRWR/LVW
0DUN0RGH
3DJH
'ULYH
86%;7,&.
2
3
ENTER
MARK
FAV
CHAR/NUM
ᯕ0DUN$OO
ᯕ8QPDUN$OO
ᯕ([LW0DUN0RGH
᰿([LW
Mark your desired photo files.
View the marked photo files.
ᯒ0RYHᯙ0DUN᱇3DJH&KDQJH᱅0DUN
ᯕ9LHZ0DUNHG
Select the desired
photo files.
4
RED
ᯫ
RED
GREEN
Mark All: Mark all photos on the screen.
YELLOW
Unmark All: Deselect all marked photos.
BLUE
110
View Marked: Display the selected photo.
Enter or exit the Mark Mode.
When one or more photos are
marked, you can view individual photos or a slide show of the marked
photos. If no photos are marked, you
can view all photos individually or all
photos in the folder in a slide show.
Full Screen Menu
More operations are available in full screen mode.
3DJH
3KRWR/LVW
86%;7,&.
'ULYH
3DJH
ᯒ0RYHᯙ9LHZ᱇3DJH&KDQJH᱅0DUN
ᯕ7R0XVLF/LVW
ᯕ&KDQJH1XPEHUV
ᯕ0DUN0RGH
MY MEDIA
ᯕ&KDQJH'HYLFH
᰿([LW
BDMSJ
[
.%
‫܁‬
‫۽‬
‫܁‬
6OLGHVKRZᱥ
1
2
3
%*0ᱥ
ᱨ
᱂
ᰚ
The aspect ratio of a photo may change the size
of the photo displayed on the screen in full size.
‫۽‬
ᱭ2SWLRQ
ᰙ+LGH
Select the target folder or drive.
ENTER
ENTER
᰿([LW
ᯫ
Use the CH (ᰜᰝ) button to navigate
in the photo page.
Select the desired photos.
The selected photo is displayed in full
size.
111
MY MEDIA
BDMSJ
[
.%
4
ENTER
Select the Slideshow,
‫܁‬
BGM, ᱨ(Rotate), ᱂ /᱃, ᰚ
(Energy Saving), Option, or Hide.
‫۽‬
ᯫ
MY MEDIA
6OLGHVKRZᱥ
%*0ᱥ
ᱨ
‫܁‬
᱂
ᰚ
‫۽‬
ᱭ2SWLRQ
ᰙ+LGH
Use ! button to select the previous or next photo.
᰿([LW
Ź Slideshow: Selected photos are displayed during the slide show. If no photo is selected, all photos
in the current folder are displayed during slide show.
ᯫ Set the time interval of the slide show in Option-Set Photo View. menu (Refer to p. 113).
ᯫ You can adjust Option by using the Q.MENU button on the remote control.
Ź BGM (Background Music): Listen to music while viewing photos in full size.
ᯫ Set the BGM device and album in Option-Set Photo View. menu (Refer to p. 113).
ᯫ You can adjust Option by using the Q.MENU button on the remote control.
Ź ᱨ(Rotate): Rotate photos.
ᯫ Rotates the photo 90 °, 180 °, 270 °, 360 ° clockwise.
ᯫ Photos cannot be rotated if its width is greater than the available supported resolution height.
Ź ᱂ /᱃: View the photo in full mode or original mode.
Ź ᰚ(Energy Saving): Increase the brightness of your screen by using ENERGY SAVING button.
Ź Option: Set values for Slide Speed and BGM (Refer to p.113).
ᯫ You cannot change BGM while BGM is playing.
ᯫ You can only select the MP3 folder saved on the device that currently displays the photo.
Ź Hide: Hide the menu on the full-sized screen.
ᯫ To see the menu again on the full-sized screen, press ENTER button to display.
Ź Exit: Move to the previous menu screen.
112
Using the Photo List Function
BDMSJ
[
.%
&KRRVHRSWLRQV
6HW3KRWR9LHZ
‫܁‬
‫۽‬
6HW9LGHR
6HW$XGLR
6HW'YLGHR
6OLGHVKRZᱥ
1
%*0ᱥ
ᱨ
᱂
ᰚ
&ORVH
‫۽‬
ᱭ2SWLRQ
ᰙ+LGH
᰿([LW
For 42/47/55LX6500
MY MEDIA
‫܁‬
Show the Option menu.
Q.MENU
! NOTE
2
ENTER
Select the desired menu option.
Set Photo View Menu Options
6HW3KRWR9LHZ
6OLGH6SHHG
‫܁‬
%*0
)DVW
For 42/47/55LX6500
Ź You cannot select the Option in 3D
imaging mode.
Ź If you want to listen to BGM (background
music) while viewing *mpo image files,
play a *jpg file and set the BGM folder in
"Option - Set Photo View." Then, you
can select and listen to BGM when viewing *mpo files.
‫۽‬
'ULYH
ؒ5HSHDW
‫܁‬
2Q
‫۽‬
ؒ5DQGRP
‫܁‬
2II
‫۽‬
ᰙ3UHYLRXV
1
2
Select Slide Speed or BGM.
Make appropriate adjustments.
113
MY MEDIA
* Image shown may differ from your TV.
Set Video Menu Options
For LED LCD TV/LCD TV
For Plasma TV
6HW9LGHR
6HW9LGHR
‫܁‬
3LFWXUH0RGH
‫۽‬
6WDQGDUG
‫܁‬
3LFWXUH0RGH
‫۽‬
6WDQGDUG
MY MEDIA
ؒ%DFNOLJKW
‫܁‬
‫۽‬
ؒ&RQWUDVW
‫܁‬
‫۽‬
ؒ&RQWUDVW
‫܁‬
‫۽‬
ؒ%ULJKWQHVV
‫܁‬
‫۽‬
ؒ%ULJKWQHVV
‫܁‬
‫۽‬
ؒ6KDUSQHVV
‫܁‬
‫۽‬
ؒ&RORU
‫܁‬
‫۽‬
ؒ&RORU
‫܁‬
‫۽‬
ؒ'\QDPLF&RQWUDVW
‫܁‬
0HGLXP
‫۽‬
ؒ7LQW
‫ ܁‬5
*
‫۽‬
ؒ(GJH(QKDQFHU
‫܁‬
+LJK
‫۽‬
ؒ&RORU7HPS
‫ ܁‬:
&
‫۽‬
ؒ1RLVH5HGXFWLRQ
‫܁‬
0HGLXP
‫۽‬
ؒ1RLVH5HGXFWLRQ
‫܁‬
‫܁‬
/RZ
‫۽‬
7UX0RWLRQ
ᯕ3LFWXUH5HVHW
ᯕ3LFWXUH5HVHW
1
ENTER
BLUE
/RZ
‫۽‬
ᰙ3UHYLRXV
ᰙ3UHYLRXV
Make appropriate adjustments.
Then, select Previous.
Reset picture settings to default.
Set 3D video Menu Options
(For 42/47/55LX6500)
Set Audio Menu Options
6HW$XGLR
6RXQG0RGH
‫܁‬
6WDQGDUG
‫۽‬
$XWR9ROXPH
‫܁‬
2II
‫۽‬
&OHDU9RLFH,,
‫܁‬
2II
‫۽‬
%DODQFH ‫ ܁‬/
5
3XWRQ'JODVVHV
6LWPHWHUVIURP79WRHQMR\WKHEHVW'
YLHZ
7RVHOHFWPRUHFRPIRUWDEOHYLHZIRU
\RXFKDQJHWROHIWULJKWLPDJHRIJODVVHV
ZLWKᯕEXWWRQ
‫۽‬
ᯙ(QWHU
ᯕ6HWWLQJ/HIW5LJKW
ᰙ3UHYLRXV
1
ENTER
114
Make appropriate adjustments.
Then, select Previous.
(QG'9LGHR
'
3D
For more information, see the 3D
Imaging section in the Owner's
Manual.
MUSIC LIST
This TV cannot play back copy-protected files.
The On-Screen Display on your model may be slightly different.
Supported Music File: *.MP3
Bit rate range: 32 Kbps - 320 Kbps
ţ4BNQMJOHSBUF.1&(-BZFSL)[L)[L)[
ţ4BNQMJOHSBUF.1&(-BZFSL)[L)[L)[
Screen Components
MENU
Select MY MEDIA.
2
ENTER
ENTER
Select Music List.
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
Preview: If any album jacket for
the file (Album Art Image)
exists, this picture is displayed.
Moves to upper level folder
Current page/Total pages
Corresponding buttons on the
remote control
Contents under the folder
focused on 2
Current page/total pages of
contents
MY MEDIA
1
3
3DJH
0XVLF/LVW
'ULYH
86%;7,&.
1
%PS
%PS
3DJH
%PS
6
%PS
5
%PS
ᯒ0RYHᯙ3OD\᱇3DJH&KDQJH᱅0DUN
ᯕ&KDQJH'HYLFH
ᯕ7R0RYLH/LVW
ᯕ&KDQJH1XPEHUV
ᯕ0DUN0RGH
᰿([LW
4
Abnormal files are
displayed using this
graphic.
Non-supported files
are displayed using
this graphic.
RED
Change to a different input.
GREEN
Move to Movie List or Photo List.
YELLOW
Change Numbers: Changes the number or
thumbnails displayed at a time.
BLUE
Allows you to mark certain files.
EXIT
Return to TV viewing.
ENERGY
SAVING
Press the ENERGY SAVING button repeatedly
to increase the brightness of your screen
(Refer to p. 132). (For LED LCD TV / LCD TV:
It's available "ENERGY SAVING - Off, Screen
Off" only.)
115
MY MEDIA
Music Selection
3DJH
0XVLF/LVW
1
'ULYH
86%;7,&.
Select the target folder or drive.
3DJH
%PS
%PS
%PS
%PS
2
ENTER
%PS
Select the desired
music file.
3
ENTER
Music files are played.
ᯒ0RYHᯙ3OD\᱇3DJH&KDQJH᱅0DUN
ᯕ&KDQJH'HYLFH
ᯕ7R0RYLH/LVW
ᯕ&KDQJH1XPEHUV
ᯕ0DUN0RGH
᰿([LW
ᯫ
MY MEDIA
Use the CH (ᰜᰝ) button to navigate
in the music page.
Mark Mode
3DJH
1
0XVLF/LVW
0DUN0RGH
'ULYH
86%;7,&.
%PS
%PS
Select the target folder or
drive.
3DJH
%PS
%PS
%PS
2
3
ENTER
MARK
FAV
CHAR/NUM
ᯒ0RYHᯙ0DUN᱇3DJH&KDQJH᱅0DUN
ᯕ3OD\0DUNHG
RED
ᯕ8QPDUN$OO
ᯕ([LW0DUN0RGH
Play Marked: Play the selected songs. Once a
song finishes playing, the next selected one
will be played automatically.
Mark All: Mark all songs in the folder.
YELLOW
Unmark All: Deselect all marked song.
Enter or exit the Mark Mode.
4
RED
᰿([LW
GREEN
BLUE
116
ᯕ0DUN$OO
ᯫ
Select the desired
music file.
Mark your desired music file.
Play the marked music file.
When one or more music files are
marked, the marked music files will
be played in sequence.
Using the Music List Function
3DJH
0XVLF/LVW
ILOHV0DUNHG
'ULYH
3DJH
&KRRVHRSWLRQV
6HW$XGLR3OD\
ᰦ
ᯡ
%PS
%PS
%PS
%PS
%PS
ᰦ
%PS
ᰧ
Q.MENU
ᰦ
ᰨ
ᰪ
ᰩ
ᯚᯛ
ᯕ3OD\ZLWK3KRWR
ᰚ
ᱭ2SWLRQ
ᰙ+LGH
Show the Option menu.
2
ENTER
&ORVH
Select Set Audio Play. or Set Audio..
᰿([LW
! NOTE
MY MEDIA
1
6HW$XGLR
ᯡ
ᯡ
Ź You can listen to the music only within
the device currently played.
Using the remote control
Stop playback.
Return to normal playback.
Paused playback.
Select the previous or next song.
GREEN
ENERGY
SAVING
Play with Photo: Start playing the selected songs and then move to the Photo List.
Press the ENERGY SAVING button repeatedly to increase the brightness of your screen
(Refer to p. 132). (For LED LCD TV/LCD TV: It's available "ENERGY SAVING - Off,
Screen Off" only.)
A cursor indicating the position can be played.
EXIT
Move to the previous menu screen.
117
MY MEDIA
Set Audio Play Menu Options
6HW$XGLR3OD\
5HSHDW
‫܁‬
2Q
‫۽‬
5DQGRP
‫܁‬
2II
‫۽‬
ᰙ3UHYLRXV
MY MEDIA
1
2
Select Repeat or Random.
Make appropriate adjustments.
Set Audio Menu Options
6HW$XGLR
6RXQG0RGH
‫܁‬
6WDQGDUG
‫۽‬
$XWR9ROXPH
‫܁‬
2II
‫۽‬
&OHDU9RLFH,,
‫܁‬
2II
‫۽‬
%DODQFH ‫ ܁‬/
5
‫۽‬
ᰙ3UHYLRXV
1
2
118
Select Sound Mode, Auto Volume, Clear
Voice II or Balance.
Make appropriate adjustments.
ᯫ
If you don't press any buttons for a while, the play information box
will float across the screen. This prevents screen pixel damage due
to a fixed image remaining on the screen for a extended period of
time.
%PS
ᰦ
Ź A damaged or corrupted music does not play but displays 00:00 in playtime.
Ź Music files with copy-protection will not play.
Ź Press ENTER or ᰧ button to stop the screen saver.
MY MEDIA
! NOTE
119
MY MEDIA
DIVX REGISTRATION CODE
Using the registration number, movies can be rented or purchased at www.divx.com/vod.
Only DivX files matched with the registration code of the purchased TV are playable.
'LY;5HJ&RGH
0<0(',$
'HDFWLYDWLRQ
0RYLH/LVW
MY MEDIA
1
2
3
4
0XVLF/LVW
ᰙ3UHYLRXV
<RXPXVWUHJLVWHU\RXUGHYLFHWR
SOD\'LY;SURWHFWHGYLGHRV
5HJLVWUDWLRQFRGH[[[[[[[[[[
5HJLVWHUDWKWWSYRGGLY[FRP
&ORVH
Select MY MEDIA.
MENU
ENTER
3KRWR/LVW
L
BLUE
Select DivX Option.
Select DivX Reg. Code.
ENTER
Display Divx Reg. Code.
! NOTE
Ź When loading, some buttons may not work.
Ź If you use the DivX registration code of another device, the rented or purchased DivX file cannot
be played. Therefore always use the DivX registration code assigned to this product.
Ź The video or audio of a file converted based on a standard other than the DivX codec standard
may be corrupted or unable to be played.
Ź The DRM/*.tp/*.trp file in DLNA server is not played when Movie List is in operation.
120
DEACTIVATION
The purpose of deactivation is to allow deactivation of devices for users who have activated all the
available devices through the web server and are blocked from activating more devices. DivX VOD
allows the consumer to activate up to 6 devices under one account.
Delete the existing authentication information to receive a new DivX user authentication for TV. Once
this function is executed, a DivX user authentication is required again to see DivX DRM files.
'LY;5HJ&RGH
0<0(',$
'HDFWLYDWLRQ
1
2
3
4
5
0XVLF/LVW
ᰙ3UHYLRXV
<HV
1R
Select MY MEDIA.
MENU
ENTER
3KRWR/LVW
'HUHJLVWUDWLRQFRGH
'HUHJLVWHUDWKWWSYRGGLY[FRP
&RQWLQXHZLWKUHJLVWUDWLRQ"
MY MEDIA
0RYLH/LVW
L
BLUE
Select DivX Option.
Select Deactivation.
ENTER
ENTER
Select Yes.
Display Deactivation.
121
NETWORK
NETWORK
LEGAL NOTICE
/HJDO1RWLFH
1(7:25.
ؒ 1HWZRUN6HWWLQJ
:LUHG
ؒ 1HWZRUN6WDWXV
,QWHUQHWLVFRQQHFWHG
ؒ /HJDO1RWLFH
SDJH
ᯒ0RYHᯙ(QWHU
ᯙ
ᯐ
ؒ (61
,03257$17127,&(5(/$7,1*721(7:25.6(59,&($OOFRQWHQWDQGVHUYLFHV
DFFHVVLEOHWKURXJKWKLVGHYLFHEHORQJWRWKLUGSDUWLHVDQGDUHSURWHFWHGE\FRS\ULJKWSDWHQW
WUDGHPDUNDQGRURWKHULQWHOOHFWXDOSURSHUW\ODZV6XFKFRQWHQWDQGVHUYLFHVDUHSURYLGHG
VROHO\IRU\RXUSHUVRQDOQRQFRPPHUFLDOXVH<RXPD\QRWXVHDQ\FRQWHQWRUVHUYLFHVLQD
PDQQHUWKDWKDVQRWEHHQDXWKRUL]HGE\WKHFRQWHQWRZQHURUVHUYLFHSURYLGHU:LWKRXW
OLPLWLQJWKHIRUHJRLQJXQOHVVH[SUHVVO\DXWKRUL]HGE\WKHDSSOLFDEOHFRQWHQWRZQHURUVHUYLFH
SURYLGHU\RXPD\QRWFRS\XSORDGSRVWWUDQVPLWWUDQVODWHVHOOPRGLI\FUHDWH
GHULYDWLYHZRUNVRUGLVWULEXWHLQDQ\PDQQHURUPHGLXPDQ\FRQWHQWRUVHUYLFHVGLVSOD\HG
WKURXJKWKLVGHYLFH<28(;35(66/<$&.12:/('*($1'$*5((7+$77+('(9,&($1'
$//7+,5'3$57<&217(17$1'6(59,&(6$5(3529,'('$6,6:,7+287:$55$17<
2)$1<.,1'(,7+(5(;35(6625,03/,('/*(/(&7521,&6(;35(66/<',6&/$,06$//
:$55$17,(6$1'&21',7,216:,7+5(63(&772$1<&217(17$1'6(59,&(6(,7+(5
(;35(6625,03/,(',1&/8',1*%87127/,0,7('72:$55$17,(62)
0(5&+$17$%,/,7<2)6$7,6)$&725<48$/,7<),71(66)25$3$57,&8/$5385326(
ᯝ
&ORVH
NETWORK
1
2
MENU
Select NETWORK.
ENTER
Select Legal Notice.
3
ENTER
4
EXIT
Check Legal notice.
Return to TV viewing.
IMPORTANT NOTICE RELATING TO NETWORK SERVICE
All content and services accessible through this device belong
to third parties and are protected by copyright, patent, trademark
and/or other intellectual property laws. Such content and services are provided solely for your personal noncommercial use.
You may not use any content or services in a manner that has
not been authorized by the content owner or service provider.
Without limiting the foregoing, unless expressly authorized by
the applicable content owner or service provider, you may not
copy, upload, post, transmit, translate, sell, modify, create derivative works, or distribute in any manner or medium any content
or services displayed through this device.
YOU EXPRESSLY ACKNOWLEDGE AND AGREE THAT THE
DEVICE AND ALL THIRD PARTY CONTENT AND SERVICES
ARE PROVIDED "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. LG ELECTRONICS EXPRESSLY
DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS WITH
RESPECT TO ANY CONTENT AND SERVICES, EITHER
EXPRESS OR, IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, OF SATISFACTORY
QUALITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND
NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. LG DOES
NOT GUARANTEE THE ACCURACY, VALIDITY, TIMELINESS,
LEGALITY, OR COMPLETENESS OF ANY CONTENT OR
SERVICE MADE AVAILABLE THROUGH THIS DEVICE AND
DOES NOT WARRANT THAT THE DEVICE OR SERVICES WILL
MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS, OR THAT OPERATION OF THE
122
DEVICE OR SERVICES WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERRORFREE. UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES, INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE, SHALL LG BE LIABLE, WHETHER IN CONTRACT
OR TORT, FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL
OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR ANY OTHER DAMAGES
ARISING OUT OF, ANY INFORMATION CONTAINED IN, OR
ANY CONTENT OR SERVICE ACCESSED BY YOU OR ANY
THIRD PARTY, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH DAMAGES.
Third party services may be changed, suspended, removed,
terminated or interrupted, or access may be disabled at any
time, without notice, and LG makes no representation or warranty that any content or service will remain available for any
period of time. Content and services are transmitted by third
parties by means of networks and transmission facilities over
which LG has no control. LG may impose limits on the use of or
access to certain services or content, in any case and without
notice or liability. LG expressly disclaims any responsibility or
liability for any change, interruption, disabling, removal of or
suspension of any content or service made available through
this device.
LG is neither responsible nor liable for customer service related
to the content and services. Any question or request for service
relating to the content or services should be made directly to the
respective content and service providers.
NETCAST
NETCAST MENU
These services are provided by separate Content Provider.
NETCAST menu source can differ by country.
What is a NETCAST?
Stream movies, TV shows and video, or get up to the minute news, stock information or weather updates
directly to your TV.
ᯫ
To view the owner’s manual that provided by
the Content Provider, visit our website at
http://www.lg.com.
To see the activation method of Yahoo!,
Netflix, or Vudu, click the Yahoo!, Netflix,
Vudu in the CD manual (For USA).
ᯫ
1
Yahoo! (For USA)
Yahoo! TV Widgets give you the best of the
Internet in perfect harmony with the simplicity
and reliability of your TV. TV Widgets deliver a
Cinematic internetTM experience by converting
your favorite web services for viewing on the TV.
ᯫ Netflix (For USA)
You can instantly watch movies (quite a few new
releases) & TV episodes from Netflix streamed
over the internet to your TV.
To become a Netflix member visit: www.netflix.
com/LG
Note that this service is provided by the Content
Provider, Netflix. It is dependent on Netflix to provide the data.
ᯫ Vudu (For USA)
In order to make rental/purchase transactions on
the Vudu service, a user must create an account
on vudu.com.
That account is linked to a specific device, via a
process called “activation”. It is possible to have
multiple devices associated with a single Vudu
account.
Note that this service is provided by the Content
Provider, Vudu. It is dependent on Vudu to provide the data.
ᯫ YouTube
YouTube is a video sharing website where users
can upload, view, and share video clips.
2
ENTER
Enjoy Online Service.
ᯫ
Picasa
Picasa is an application from Google that appreciates digital image files.
! NOTE
NETCAST
ᯫ
Select NETCAST menu option.
Ź The videos list searched from the TV may
different with the list searched from a web
browser on PC.
Ź The settings of this TV do not affect the
YouTube’s playback quality.
Ź The playback of videos may be paused,
stopped or buffering occurring often
depending on your broadband speed.
Ź For service that requires log in, join the
applicable service on the website using the
PC and log in through the TV to enjoy
various additional functionalities.
Ź When you set the city you want with Setup
by pressing the red button, the background
of NetCast will be set to the weather of the
selected city.
Ź For Plasma TV: If there is no user action 2
minutes following freezing image or video
on screen, the screensaver will activate
itself preventing fixed image remaining on
screen.
123
NETCAST
YOUTUBE
YouTube is a video sharing website where users can upload, view, and share video clips.
Screen Components
1
2
YouTube menu
Videos list
1
2
RED
Set the option menu.
NETCAST
Return to Netcast menu.
EXIT
Return to TV viewing.
NOTE
Ź When you press the Q.menu button while the Youtube video is playing in full mode, you can set
the video options.
124
YouTube menu
Home: You can watch the popular video in real time.
Featured: The featured videos list will be displayed.
Popular: The best rated videos list from YouTube server will be displayed.
Most Viewed: The most viewed videos list will be displayed.
Search: The keypad/keyboard menu will be displayed.
History: The videos list that you previously played will be displayed. Maximum of 20 videos can be stored.
Favorites: In sign-in status, this menu will be displayed the videos list that is arranged in the YouTube
server with your account (Some videos may not appear on the Favorites list, even if the videos are
arranged in the server).
Sign in (Sign Out): Displays the keypad/keyboard menu to sign in or returns to the sign-out status.
Stops the video and displays related videos list.
NETCAST
Using the remote control
Pause the video while it is playing.
Play the selected video.
Skip the playback forward or backward.
RED
Set the option menu.
Return to Netcast menu.
EXIT
Return to TV viewing.
125
NETCAST
PICASA
Picasa is a photo organizing or sharing website where users can upload, view, and share photos.
Screen Components
1
1
2
Picasa menu
Photo list
2
NETCAST
Navigate the desired photos.
ENTER
The selected photo file is displayed.
Return to Netcast menu.
EXIT
126
Return to TV viewing.
Picasa menu
Home: The featured photos list will be displayed.
Friends: You can register users with the pictures you want as friends. You can add up to 10 friends.
Search: The keypad/keyboard menu will be displayed.
My Photos: You can view the pictures uploaded to the Web. This function can only be used when you sign
in.
Sign in (Sign Out): Displays the keypad/keyboard menu to sign in or returns to the sign-out status.
NETCAST
127
PICTURE
PICTURE CONTROL
CONTROL
PICTURE SIZE (ASPECT RATIO) CONTROL
This feature lets you choose the way an analog picture with a 4:3 aspect ratio is displayed on your TV.
You can select a different aspect ratio depending on input source (analog broadcasting, digital broadcasting, aux).
3,&785(
ؒ $VSHFW5DWLR
ᯒ0RYHᯙ(QWHU
ᯙ
ᯱ
ؒ 3LFWXUH:L]DUG
3,&785(
ᯒ0RYHᯙ(QWHU
ؒ $VSHFW5DWLR
ؒ 3LFWXUH:L]DUG
ؒ ᰚ(QHUJ\6DYLQJ 2II
ؒ 3LFWXUH0RGH
6WDQGDUG
ؒ%DFNOLJKW
ؒ&RQWUDVW
ؒ%ULJKWQHVV
ؒ6K
DUSQ
6K
S HVV
HVV
ؒ ᰚ(QHUJ\6DYLQJ 2II
ؒ 3LFWXUH0RGH
6WDQGDUG
ᯙ
ᯡ
ᯱ
۳-XVW6FDQ
ؒ&RQWUDVW
۳6HW%\3URJUDP
ؒ%ULJKWQHVV ۳
ؒ6K
DUSQ
6K
S HVV
HVV ۳=RRP
ؒ%DFNOLJKW
۳&LQHPD=RRP
1
2
MENU
Select PICTURE.
ᯫ
ᯫ
PICTURE CONTROL
ENTER
Select Aspect Ratio.
ENTER
Select the desired picture format.
3
4
BACK
EXIT
You can also adjust Aspect Ratio in
the Q.MENU.
Press the RATIO button repeatedly to
select the desired picture format.
Return to the previous menu.
Return to TV viewing.
When adjusting Zoom or Cinema Zoom in Q.MENU
1
2
Q.MENU
ENTER
Select Zoom or Cinema
Zoom.
ENTER
Adjust proportion of Zoom or
Cinema Zoom. The Cinema
Zoom adjustment range is
1-16.
3
4
ENTER
128
Select Aspect Ratio.
Move the image on the screen.
=RRP
ᯐ0RYHᯑ=RRPᯙ(QWHU
&LQHPD=RRP
ᯐ0RYHᯑ=RRPᯙ(QWHU
16:9
4:3
Adjust the picture horizontally, in a linear
proportion to fill the entire screen.
Choose 4:3 when you want to view a picture
with an original 4:3 aspect ratio.
Just Scan
Zoom
Normally the edges of video signals are
cropped 1-2%. Just Scan turns off this
cropping and shows the complete video.
Notes: If there is noise on the edges of the
original signal, it will be visible when Just Scan
is activated.
Just Scan operates only in DTV/Cable DTV/
C o m p o n e n t / H D M I - DT V/ D V I - DT V
(720p/1080i/1080p) input source.
Choose Zoom when you want to view the
picture without any alteration. However, the
top and bottom portions of the picture will
be cropped.
Set By Program
Selects the proper picture proportion to
match the source’s image.
(4:3
Cinema Zoom
Choose Cinema Zoom when you want to
enlarge the picture in correct proportion.
This enlarges an image with cinemascope
aspect ratio (2.35:1) without distortion.
Note: When enlarging or reducing the picture, the image may become distorted.
PICTURE CONTROL
-XVW6FDQ
4:3)
6HW%\3URJUDP
(16:9
16:9)
6HW%\3URJUDP
129
PICTURE CONTROL
PICTURE WIZARD
This feature lets you adjust the picture quality of the original image. Use this to calibrate the screen
quality by adjusting the Black and White Level etc. You can calibrate the screen quality by easily following each step. When you adjust the image to Low, Recommended or High, you can see the example of
the changes you made.
3,&785(
ؒ $VSHFW5DWLR
ᯒ0RYHᯙ(QWHU
%ODFN/HYHO
6HWWKHVFUHHQDERYHLGHQWLFDOWRWKH5HFRPPHQGHGVDPSOH
EHORZ
ᯙ
ᯐ
ؒ 3LFWXUH:L]DUG
ؒ ᰚ(QHUJ\6DYLQJ 2II
1
2
ؒ 3LFWXUH0RGH
6WDQGDUG
ؒ%DFNOLJKW
ؒ&RQWUDVW
ؒ%ULJKWQHVV
ؒ6K
6KDUSQ
6KDUSQ
6K
S HVV
HVV
/RZ
5HFRPPHQGHG
ؒ%ULJKWQHVV
+LJK
‫܁‬
‫۽‬
ᰙ3UHYLRXV
Select PICTURE.
MENU
ENTER
ENTER
5
ᯙ1H[W
ENTER
Adjust Black Level.
Select Picture
Wizard.
:KLWH/HYHO
3LFWXUH:L]DUG
:LWK3LFWXUH:L]DUG\RXFDQDGMXVWWKHSLFWXUHTXDOLW\RIWKH
RULJLQDOLPDJH
6HWWKHVFUHHQDERYHLGHQWLFDOWRWKH5HFRPPHQGHGVDPSOH
EHORZ
PICTURE CONTROL
ᰦ
/RZ
5HFRPPHQGHG
ؒ&RQWUDVW
ᰙ3UHYLRXV
3
ENTER
ᯙ1H[W
Adjust Picture Wizard.
+LJK
‫܁‬
‫۽‬
ᰙ3UHYLRXV
6
ᯙ1H[W
ENTER
Adjust White Level.
3LFWXUH:L]DUG
7LQW
6HWWKHVFUHHQDERYHLGHQWLFDOWRWKH5HFRPPHQGHGVDPSOH
EHORZ
6WDQGDUG
ؒ6WDQGDUG3UHIHUUHG
3UHIHUUHG
/RZ
‫܁‬6WDQGDUG‫۽‬
5HFRPPHQGHG
ؒ7LQW
‫܁‬
+LJK
5
ᰙ3UHYLRXV
4
ᯫ
130
*
‫۽‬
ᯙ1H[W
ᰙ3UHYLRXV
ENTER
Adjust Standard/
Preferred.
If you select Preferred, OSD (On Screen
Display) differ from that shown in this manual.
7
ᯙ1H[W
ENTER
Adjust Tint.
For LED LCD TV/LCD TV
%DFNOLJKW
&RORU
6HWWKHVFUHHQDERYHLGHQWLFDOWRWKH5HFRPPHQGHGVDPSOH
EHORZ
/RZ
5HFRPPHQGHG
ؒ&RORU
‫܁‬
ᰙ3UHYLRXV
6HWWKH%DFNOLJKWWR\RXU%ULJKWQHVVSUHIHUHQFH
'DUN
+LJK
ؒ%DFNOLJKW
‫۽‬
ᯙ1H[W
5HFRPPHQGHG
‫܁‬
ENTER
‫۽‬
ᰙ3UHYLRXV
ᯙ1H[W
11
8
%ULJKW
ENTER
Adjust Color.
Adjust Backlight.
i.e)
&RPSOHWH
+RUL]RQWDO6KDUSQHVV
6HWWKHVFUHHQDERYHLGHQWLFDOWRWKH5HFRPPHQGHGVDPSOH
EHORZ
ᯐ0RYH᱅0DUN
6HOHFWDQLQSXWVWRDSSO\WKHVHWWLQJV
ᯡ'79
۳79
۳$9
۳$9
/RZ
5HFRPPHQGHG
ؒ+6KDUSQHVV
‫܁‬
ᰙ3UHYLRXV
۳&RPSRQHQW
+LJK
۳&RPSRQHQW
‫۽‬
۳5*%3&
ᯡ+'0,
ᯙ1H[W
ᯡ+'0,
9
ENTER
Adjust Horizontal
Sharpness.
ᯡ+'0,
:DUQLQJ7KHSLFWXUHTXDOLW\PD\YDU\DFFRUGLQJWRWKHGLIIHUHQWW\SHVRI
VLJQDODQGLQSXWV
ᰙ3UHYLRXV
9HUWLFDO6KDUSQHVV
6HWWKHVFUHHQDERYHLGHQWLFDOWRWKH5HFRPPHQGHGVDPSOH
EHORZ
/RZ
5HFRPPHQGHG
ؒ96KDUSQHVV
ᰙ3UHYLRXV
‫܁‬
+LJK
ENTER
MARK
FAV
CHAR/NUM
13
Adjust Vertical
Sharpness.
Select input source to
apply the settings.
L
ENTER
‫۽‬
ᯙ1H[W
10
12
ᯙ&RQILUP
Save.
PICTURE CONTROL
ᯡ+'0,
7KHFXUUHQWDGMXVWPHQWYDOXHLV
VDYHGWR([SHUW
&ORVH
14
ᯫ
ᯫ
ᯫ
ENTER
Finish the Picture Wizard.
If you stop the Picture Wizard before the
final step, the changes will not be saved to
the TV.
Once the Picture Wizard sets the picture
quality, Energy Saving is changed to Off
automatically.
To reset changes made by Picture Wizard,
operate Picture Reset when Picture Mode
is on Expert1.
131
PICTURE CONTROL
ᰚENERGY SAVING
It reduces the TV’s power consumption.
The default factory setting is adjusted to the comfortable level to be viewed at home.
You can increase the brightness of your screen by adjusting the Energy Saving level or by adjusting the
Picture Mode.
3,&785(
ᯒ0RYHᯙ(QWHU
ؒ $VSHFW5DWLR
3,&785(
ؒ $VSHFW5DWLR
ؒ 3LFWXUH:L]DUG
ᯒ0RYHᯙ(QWHU
ؒ 3LFWXUH:L]DUG
ᯙ
ᯐ
ؒ ᰚ(QHUJ\6DYLQJ 2II
ؒ 3LFWXUH0RGH
6WDQGDUG
ؒ%DFNOLJKW
ؒ&RQWUDVW
ؒ%ULJKWQHVV
ؒ6K
DUSQ
6K
S HVV
HVV
ؒ ᰚ(QHUJ\6DYLQJ 2II
ؒ 3LFWXUH0RGH
6WDQGDUG
۳$XWR
ᯡ2II
ؒ%DFNOLJKW
۳0LQLPXP
ؒ&RQWUDVW
۳0HGLXP
ؒ%ULJKWQHVV ۳0D[LPXP
ؒ6K
DUSQ
6K
S HVV
HVV ۳6FUHHQ2II
LED LCD TV,
LCD TV
1
PICTURE CONTROL
2
MENU
Select PICTURE.
ENTER
Select ᰚ Energy Saving.
ᯫ
ᯫ
3
ENTER
Select your desired menu option.
ᯫ
4
BACK
Return to the previous menu.
ᯫ
EXIT
Return to TV viewing.
ᯫ
ᯫ
ᯫ
ᯫ
132
۳,QWHOOLJHQW6HQVRU
ᯙ
ᯐ
ᯡ2II
ᯙ
ᯐ
۳0LQLPXP
۳0HGLXP
۳0D[LPXP
۳6FUHHQ2II
Plasma TV
When selecting Screen off, the
screen will turn off after 3 seconds.
Pressing any button of the remote
controller will turn on the screen
again.
If you adjust “Energy Saving-Auto,
Maximum”, Backlight option will not
work (For LED LCD TV/LCD TV).
When selecting “Energy Saving Off, Minimum, or Medium, you can
adjust Backlight feature (For LED
LCD TV/LCD TV).
If you adjust “Energy SavingIntelligent Sensor”, Sharpness, Color,
Color Temperature feature will not
work (For Plasma TV).
When selecting Auto, Backlight is
automatically adjusted through
Intelligent Sensor according to the
surrounding conditions. (For LED
LCD TV/LCD TV)
When selecting Off, Energy Saving is
not used.
Press the ENERGY SAVING button
repeatedly to select the appropriate
Energy Saving.
Intelligent Sensor: The most suitable
picture is automatically adjusted
according to the surrounding conditions (For Plasma TV).
PRESET PICTURE SETTINGS (PICTURE MODE)
There are factory presets for picture settings available in the user menus. You can use a preset,
change each setting manually, or use the Intelligent Sensor.
3,&785(
ؒ $VSHFW5DWLR
ᯒ0RYHᯙ(QWHU
ؒ 3LFWXUH:L]DUG
۳,QWHOOLJHQW6HQVRU
۳,QWHOOLJHQW6HQVRU
۳9LYLG
ؒ ᰚ(QHUJ\6DYLQJ 2II
۳9LYLG
۳9LYLG
ᯡ6WDQGDUG
ؒ 3LFWXUH0RGH
6WDQGDUG
ᯡ6WDQGDUG
ؒ%DFNOLJKW
ؒ&RQWUDVW
ᯙ
ᯐ
ᯡ6WDQGDUG
ᯙ
ᯐ
۳&LQHPD
۳᯷&LQHPD
۳᯷&LQHPD
۳6SRUW
۳᯷%ULJKW5RRP
۳᯷%ULJKW5RRP
ؒ%ULJKWQHVV
۳*DPH
۳6SRUW
۳6SRUW
ؒ6K
6KDUSQ
6KDUSQ
6K
D S HVV
HVV
۳ᰛ([SHUW
۳*DPH
۳*DPH
۳ᰛ([SHUW
۳ᰛ([SHUW
۳ᰛ([SHUW
۳ᰛ([SHUW
۳ᰛ([SHUW
Other models
47/55LE8500
1
2
3
ᯫ
ᯫ
ᯫ
ᯫ
ᯫ
Select PICTURE.
ENTER
Select Picture Mode.
ENTER
Select your desired menu option.
Vivid, Standard, Cinema, Sport, and Game
Settings are preset for the optimum picture
quality at the factory.
Vivid: This is the mode to maximize the effect
of the video in the retail store. Strengthen the
contrast, brightness, color and sharpness for
vivid picture.
Standard: This is the mode to realize optimum
viewing condition for the general user.
᰽ (Auto Power Saving): This is the mode to
maximize reducing the power consumption
without hurting the picture quality. This features is available only on Plasma TV.
Cinema: This mode optimizes video for watching movies.
᯷ Cinema: This is cinema quality mode to
provide you the experience of watching a movie
at home. The user will be able enjoy the best
level of satisfactory screen quality in any movie
without any separate adjustments. ᯷Cinema
express the optimal screen quality when it is
darkest.
When selecting ᯷ Cinema, Aspect ratio
changes to Just scan.
4
BACK
EXIT
ᯫ
ᯫ
ᯫ
ᯫ
ᯫ
ᯫ
ᯫ
ᯫ
Plasma TV
Return to the previous menu.
Return to TV viewing.
᯷ Bright Room: This is the specification to
optimize TV viewing in Bright Room.
When selecting ᯷Bright Room, Aspect ratio
changes to Just scan.
Sport: This is the video mode to emphasize
dynamic video and primary color (e.g, white,
uniform, grass, sky blue etc.) by realizing the
optimal screen for sports.
Game: This is the mode to realize fast response
speed in a fast gaming screen.
Expert: This is the mode to adjust the video in
detail for video quality expert and general user.
You can also adjust Picture Mode in the
Q.MENU.
When selecting Intelligent Sensor, Energy
Saving is changed to Auto automatically (For
LED LCD TV/LCD TV).
When selecting Intelligent Sensor, it changes
Backlight, contrast, brightness, sharpness, color
and tint automatically (For LED LCD TV/LCD
TV).
Intelligent Sensor: The most suitable picture is
automatically adjusted according to the surrounding conditions.
PICTURE CONTROL
ᯫ
MENU
ᯙ
ᯐ
۳᰽
133
PICTURE CONTROL
MANUAL PICTURE ADJUSTMENT - USER MODE
Adjust the picture appearance to suit your preference and viewing situations.
3,&785(
ؒ $VSHFW5DWLR
ᯒ0RYHᯙ(QWHU
ؒ 3LFWXUH:L]DUG
ؒ%DFNOLJKW
ؒ ᰚ(QHUJ\6DYLQJ 2II
1
2
3
PICTURE CONTROL
4
ؒ 3LFWXUH0RGH
6WDQGDUG
ؒ%DFNOLJKW
ؒ&RQWUDVW
ؒ%ULJKWQHVV
ؒ6K
6KDUSQ
6KDUSQ
6K
S HVV
HVV
ᯫ
Select PICTURE.
ENTER
Select Picture Mode.
ENTER
Select your desired menu option.
ENTER
Select Backlight (For LED LCD TV/LCD
TV), Contrast, Brightness, Sharpness,
Color, Tint, Color Temp., or Advanced
Control.
ENTER
Make appropriate adjustments.
5
6
BACK
EXIT
Return to the previous menu.
ᯫ
ᯫ
ᯫ
Return to TV viewing.
ᯫ
ᯫ
ᯫ
ᯫ
134
‫۽‬
ᯙ(QWHU
ᯙ
ᯐ
MENU
ᯰ
‫܁‬
ᯱ
Backlight (For LED LCD TV/LCD TV):
This function adjusts the brightness
of the backlight behind the LCD
screen. Adjusting the backlight is
recommended when setting the
brightness of the TV. When decreasing the backlight, the brightness of
the black becomes darker without
any loss in video signal and the
power consumption is reduced.
Backlight can only be adjusted in "
Energy Saving - Off, Minimum, or
Medium".
Contrast: Increase or decrease the
gradient of the video signal. You may
use Contrast when the bright part of
the picture is saturated.
Brightness: Adjusts the base level of
the signal in the picture. You may use
Brightness when the dark part of the
picture is saturated.
Sharpness: Adjusts the level of crispness in the edges between the light
and dark areas of the picture. The
lower the level, the softer the image.
Color: Adjusts intensity of all colors.
Tint: Adjusts the balance between
red and green levels.
Color Temp.: Set to warm to enhance
hotter colors such as red, or set to
cool to enhance cooler colors such
as blue.
PICTURE IMPROVEMENT TECHNOLOGY
(ADVANCED CONTROL)
Advanced Control allows you to adjust some of the advanced features of your LG display.
To reset to the factory default after making adjustments to each input source, execute the Picture
Reset function for each Picture Mode.
3,&785(
ᯒ0RYHᯙ(QWHU
3,&785(
ᯒ0RYHᯙ(QWHU
ؒ&R
& ORU
&
&RO
&R
ORU
ORU
ؒ7LQW
5
*
ؒ&RORU7HPS
:
&
ؒ$GYDQFHG&RQWURO
ᯙ
ᯐ
ؒ7LQW
5
'\QDPLF&RQWUDVW
ؒ&RORU7HPS :
'\QDPLF&RORU
ؒ$GYDQFHG&RQWURO
ؒ3LFWXUH5HVHW
&OHDU:KLWH
ؒ3LFWXUH5HVHW
ؒ 7UX0RWLRQ
/RZ
ؒ 7UX0RWLRQ
/RZ
6NLQ&RORU
ؒ 6FUHHQ5*%3&
ؒ&R
& ORU
&
&RO
&R
ORU
ORU
&
1RLVH5HGXFWLRQ
ؒ /('/RFDO'LPPLQJ2Q
'LJLWDO1RLVH5HGXFWLRQ
*DPPD
'\QDPLF&RQWUDVW
‫܁‬/RZ‫۽‬
2II
'\QDPLF&RORU
2II
2II
1RLVH5HGXFWLRQ
2II
ؒ 6FUHHQ5*%3&
ؒ /('/RFDO'LPPLQJ2Q
*
‫܁‬/RZ‫۽‬
*DPPD
2II
%ODFN/HYHO
2II
)LOP0RGH
0HGLXP
0HGLXP
/RZ
2II
&RORU*DPXW
:LGH
%ODFN/HYHO
/RZ
ᯝ
(\H&DUH
/RZ
&ORVH
ᯝ
Plasma TV
&ORVH
1
2
3
MENU
Select PICTURE.
ENTER
Select Advanced Control.
ENTER
Select your desired menu option.
4
PICTURE CONTROL
LED LCD TV,
LCD TV
Make appropriate adjustments.
5
BACK
EXIT
Return to the previous menu.
Return to TV viewing.
135
PICTURE CONTROL
EXPERT PICTURE CONTROL
ᰛExpert1 and ᰛExpert2 provide even more advanced picture settings for users. Typical used by
professionals for calibrating the TV.
3,&785(
ؒ $VSHFW5DWLR
ᯒ0RYHᯙ(QWHU
3,&785(
ؒ 3LFWXUH:L]DUG
ؒ ᰚ(QHUJ\6DYLQJ 2II
ؒ9
96K
6K
6KDUSQHV
6KDU
S V
SQHV
'\QDPLF&RQWUDVW
ؒ&RORU
1RLVH5HGXFWLRQ
ؒ7LQW
'LJLWDO1RLVH5HGXFWLRQ
ؒ([SHUW&RQWURO
ؒ 3LFWXUH0RGH
ᰛ([SHUW
ؒ%DFNOLJKW
ؒ&RQWUDVW
ؒ%ULJKWQHVV
ᯙ
ؒ3LFWXUH5HVHW
%ODFN/HYHO
ؒ 7UX0RWLRQ
/RZ
5HDO&LQHPD
ؒ 6FUHHQ5*%3&
&RORU*DPXW
ؒ /('/RFDO'LPPLQJ2Q
ؒ+
6K
+6K
+
6KDUSQHV
6KDU
S V SQHV
۳*DPH
ᯡᰛ([SHUW
ᯙ
ᯐ
۳ᰛ([SHUW
PICTURE CONTROL
2
3
4
5
MENU
Select PICTURE.
ENTER
Select Picture Mode.
ENTER
Select ᰛExpert1 or ᰛExpert2.
ENTER
Select Expert Control.
ENTER
Select your desired menu option.
6
Make appropriate adjustments.
7
BACK
EXIT
136
Return to the previous menu.
Return to TV viewing.
‫܁‬2II‫۽‬
*
5
2II &
:
۳6SRUW
1
ᯒ0RYHᯙ(QWHU
'\QDPLF&RQWUDVW
‫܁‬2II‫۽‬
1RLVH5HGXFWLRQ
2II
2II
*DPPD
/RZ
%ODFN/HYHO
2Q
)LOP0RGH
0HGLXP
/RZ
2Q
:LGH
&RORU*DPXW
(GJH(QKDQFHU
+LJK
(GJH(QKDQFHU
+LJK
[Y<FF
$XWR
[Y<FF
$XWR
([SHUW3DWWHUQ
2II
:LGH
([SHUW3DWWHUQ
2II
ᯝ
ᯝ
&ORVH
&ORVH
LED LCD TV,
LCD TV
Plasma TV
*This feature is not available for all models.
ᯫ
Adjusts the contrast to keep it at the best level according to the brightness
of the screen. The picture is improved by making bright parts brighter and
dark parts darker.
ᯫ
Adjusts screen colors so that they look livelier, richer and clearer. This feature enhances hue, saturation and luminance so that red, blue, and green
look more vivid.
Skin Color
ᯫ
It detects the skin area of video and adjusts it to express a natural skin color.
Noise Reduction
ᯫ
Reduces screen noise without compromising video quality.
Digital Noise
Reduction
ᯫ
Removes noise caused by compressing video.
Dynamic Contrast
Dynamic Color
ᯫ
Black Level
Low: The reflection of the screen gets darker.
High: The reflection of the screen gets brighter.
ᯫ Set black level of the screen to proper level.
ᯫ This function is available in the following modes: TV, AV (NTSC-M), HDMI
or Component.
Clear White
ᯫ
Make the white area of screen brighter and more white.
ᯫ
Adjust the brightness of the screen to prevent the screen from being too
bright. Dims extremely bright pictures.
This feature is enabled in “Picture Mode-Standard, Sports, Game”.
Eye Care
ᯫ
ᯫ
Real Cinema
or
Film Mode
ᯫ
ᯫ
Makes video clips recorded in film look more natural by eliminating judder
effect.
DVD and Blu-ray movies are filmed at 24 frames per second (fps). With
LG Real Cinema, every frame is consistently processed 5 times in 1/24 of
a second producing 120 fps with TruMotion or 2 times in 1/24 of a second
producing 48 fps without TruMotion, thus totally eliminating the judder
effect.
This function can also work when TruMotion is off.
PICTURE CONTROL
Gamma
You can adjust brightness of dark areas and middle gray level areas of the
picture.
Low : Make brighter and middle gray level areas of the picture brighter.
Medium : Express original picture levels.
High: Make dark and middle gray level areas of the picture darker.
LED LCD TV/LCD TV: Advanced Control
Plasma TV: Advanced Control, Expert Control
Standard/sRGB: Displays standard set of colors.
Wide: Increase number of colors used.
ᯫ Maximize the utilization of colors to increase color quality.
Color Gamut
LED LCD TV/LCD TV: Expert Control
ᯫ Displays color domain of the signal.
Standard: Displays standard set of colors.
Wide: Increase number of colors used.
EBU: Mode to display EBU standard color area.
SMPTE: Mode to display SMPTE standard color area.
BT709: Mode to display BT709 standard color area.
137
PICTURE CONTROL
Edge Enhancer
xvYCC
Color Filter
Expert Pattern
ᯫ
Show clearer and distinctive yet natural edges in the video.
ᯫ
This produces richer colors.
This feature represents rich color as much as conventional video signal.
This function is enabled in "Picture mode - Cinema / ᯷Cinema / ᯷
Bright Room, ᰛExpert" when a xvYCC signal is inputted through HDMI.
ᯫ
ᯫ
ᯫ
This function filters specific colors in the video.
You can use the RGB filter to set color saturation and hue accurately.
ᯫ
This is a pattern used for expert adjustment.
This function is enabled in "Picture mode - ᰛExpert" when you watch
DTV.
ᯫ
ᯫ
PICTURE CONTROL
Color Temperature
Adjusts the overall color of the screen by changing the white baseline.
a. Gamma : Select 1.9, 2.2, 2.4
b. Method : 2 Points
- Pattern: Inner, Outer
- Red/Green/Blue Contrast, Red/Green/Blue Brightness:
The adjustment range is -50 - +50.
c-1. Method : 10 Point IRE (LED LCD TV, LCD TV)
- Pattern: Inner, Outer
- IRE (Institute of Radio Engineers) is the unit to display the size of the video
signal and can be set among 10, 20, 30 - 100. You can adjust Red, Green
or Blue according to each setting.
- Luminance: This function displays calculated luminance value for 2.2
gamma. You can input luminance value you want at 100 IRE, then the
target luminance value for 2.2 gamma is displayed at every 10 steps from
10 IRE to 90 IRE.
- Red/Green/Blue: The adjustment range is -50 - +50.
c-2. Method : 20 Point IRE (Plasma TV)
- IRE (Institute of Radio Engineers) is the unit to display the size of the video
signal and can be set among 5, 10, 15 - 100. You can adjust Red, Green
or Blue according to each setting.
- Red/Green/Blue: The adjustment range is -50 - +50.
d. Apply to all inputs
ᯫ
Color Management
System
138
A tool used by the experts to make adjustments by using the test patterns,
this does not affect other colors but can be used to selectively adjust the
6 color areas (Red/Green/Blue/Cyan/Mgt/Yellow).
Color difference may not be distinctive even when you make the adjustments for the general video.
Adjusts Red/Green/Blue/Yellow/Cyan, Magenta.
- Red/Green/Blue/Yellow/Cyan/Magenta Color: The adjustment range is
-30 - +30.
- Red/Green/Blue/Yellow/Cyan/Magenta Tint: The adjustment range is -30
- +30.
- This feature is disabled in RGB-PC and HDMI-PC mode.
PICTURE RESET
Settings of the selected picture modes return to the default factory settings.
3,&785(
ؒ&R
& ORU
&
&RO
&R
ORU
ORU
*
ؒ7LQW
5
" $OOSLFWXUHVHWWLQJVZLOOEHUHVHW
&
ؒ&RORU7HPS
&RQWLQXH" :
ؒ$GYDQFHG&RQWURO
ؒ3LFWXUH5HVHW
ؒ 7UX0RWLRQ
/RZ
1
3
4
<HV
ؒ&R
& ORU
&
&RO
&R
ORU
ORU
ؒ7LQW
5
*
ؒ&RORU7HPS
:
&
L
ؒ 7UX0RWLRQ
/RZ
ؒ /('/RFDO'LPPLQJ2Q
ؒ /('/RFDO'LPPLQJ2Q
ENTER
Select Picture Reset.
ENTER
Select Yes.
Initialize the adjusted value.
ؒ$GYDQFHG&RQWURO
5HVHWWLQJYLGHRFRQILJXUDWLRQ
ؒ3LFWXUH5HVHW
ؒ 6FUHHQ5*%3&
Select PICTURE.
EXIT
ᯙ
ᯒ0RYHᯙ(QWHU
ؒ 6FUHHQ5*%3&
MENU
ENTER
1Rᯐ
3,&785(
PICTURE CONTROL
2
ᯒ0RYHᯙ(QWHU
Return to TV viewing.
139
PICTURE CONTROL
TRUMOTION - For LED LCD TV, LCD TV
Advance video technology that provides clearer, smoother images, even during fast action scenes creating a more stable structure for a crisper picture.
3,&785(
ᯒ0RYHᯙ(QWHU
ؒ&R
& ORU
&RO
&R
ORU
ORU
ؒ7LQW
5
*
ؒ&RORU7HPS
:
&
ؒ$GYDQFHG&RQWURO
ؒ3LFWXUH5HVHW
ؒ 7UX0RWLRQ
/RZ
7UX0RWLRQ
‫܁‬/RZ‫۽‬
ؒ-XGGHU
ؒ%OXU
ᯙ(QWHU
ᯙ
ᯐ
ؒ 6FUHHQ5*%3&
ؒ /('/RFDO'LPPLQJ2Q
1
2
MENU
ENTER
Select PICTURE.
ᯫ
ᯫ
Select TruMotion.
ᯫ
PICTURE CONTROL
3
ENTER
ᯫ
ᯫ
ᯫ
Adjustment for TruMotion (Judder
and Blur) with selecting User
4
ENTER
5
Select Judder or Blur.
Make appropriate adjustments.
6
BACK
EXIT
140
Select Low, High, User, or Off.
Return to the previous menu.
Return to TV viewing.
ᯫ
ᯫ
Off: Turn off TruMotion operation.
Low: Provides smooth picture movement. Use this setting for standard
use.
High: Provides smoother picture
movement.
Judder: Adjusts noise of the screen.
Blur: Adjusts after-image of the screen.
TruMotion works with all inputs except
PC mode.
If you enable "TruMotion", noise may
appear on the screen. If this occurs,
set "TruMotion" to "Off".
If you select "Picture Mode-Game"
set "TruMotion" to "Off".
LED LOCAL DIMMING
- For 42/47/55LE5500, 42/47/55LE7500, 47/55LE8500, 42/47/55LX6500
After analyzing the signal of the input video by areas of the screen, it adjusts the backlight to improve
the contrast ratio. This feature is disabled in “Picture Mode-Game”.
3,&785(
ᯒ0RYHᯙ(QWHU
3,&785(
ᯒ0RYHᯙ(QWHU
ؒ&R
&
&R
& ORU
ORU
ORU
ؒ&R
&
&R
& ORU
ORU
ORU
ؒ7LQW
5
*
ؒ7LQW
5
*
ؒ&RORU7HPS
:
&
ؒ&RORU7HPS
:
&
ؒ$GYDQFHG&RQWURO
ؒ$GYDQFHG&RQWURO
ؒ3LFWXUH5HVHW
ؒ3LFWXUH5HVHW
ؒ 7UX0RWLRQ
/RZ
ؒ 7UX0RWLRQ
/RZ
ؒ 6FUHHQ5*%3&
ؒ /('/RFDO'LPPLQJ2Q
ؒ 6FUHHQ5*%3&
ᯰ
ᯙ
ؒ /('/RFDO'LPPLQJ2Q
۳2II
ᯡ2Q
1
2
Select PICTURE.
ENTER
Select LED Local Dimming.
ENTER
Select On or Off.
4
BACK
EXIT
Return to the previous menu.
Return to TV viewing.
PICTURE CONTROL
3
MENU
ᯰ
ᯙ
141
PICTURE CONTROL
POWER INDICATOR - For LED LCD TV, LCD TV
Adjust the power/standby indicator light on the front of the TV.
237,21
ᯒ0RYHᯙ(QWHU
ؒ &DSWLRQ
2II
ᯙ
ᯐ
ؒ 3RZHU,QGLFDWRU
ؒ ,QLWLDO6HWWLQJ
1
PICTURE CONTROL
2
ؒ 6HW,'
+RPH8VH
ؒ 0RGH6HWWLQJ
+RPH8VH
Select Power Indicator.
Select Standby Light or Power Light.
Select your desired options.
BACK
EXIT
142
ؒ 0RGH6HWWLQJ
ENTER
5
2Q
ؒ 6HW,'
Select OPTION.
4
‫܁‬2Q‫۽‬
3RZHU/LJKW
ؒ ,QLWLDO6HWWLQJ
MENU
ENTER
6WDQGE\/LJKW
2II
ؒ 3RZHU,QGLFDWRU
ᯫ
ᯫ
3
ᯒ0RYHᯙ(QWHU
ؒ /DQJXDJH
ؒ /DQJXDJH
ؒ &DSWLRQ
237,21
Return to the previous menu.
Return to TV viewing.
&ORVH
Standby Light: Determines whether
to set the indicator light on the front
of the TV to On or Off in standby
mode.
Power Light: Determines whether to
set the indicator light on the front of
the TV to On or Off when the power
turns on.
IMAGE STICKING MINIMIZATION (ISM) METHOD - For Plasma TV
A frozen still picture displayed on the screen for prolonged periods can result in a ghost image. You
can use Orbiter to help prevent image sticking. The other two functions are for removing a ghost
image.
237,21
ᯒ0RYHᯙ(QWHU
ؒ /DQJXDJH
ؒ &DSWLRQ
237,21
ᯒ0RYHᯙ(QWHU
ؒ /DQJXDJH
2II
ؒ &DSWLRQ
ᯙ
ᯐ
ؒ ,600HWKRG
ؒ ,QLWLDO6HWWLQJ
2II
ؒ ,600HWKRG
ؒ ,QLWLDO6HWWLQJ
ؒ 6HW,'
ؒ 6HW,'
ؒ 0RGH6HWWLQJ
+RPH8VH
ؒ 0RGH6HWWLQJ
+RPH8VH
ᯡ1RUPDO
ᯙ
ᯱ
۳2UELWHU
۳&RORU:DVK
۳:KLWH:DVK
1
2
Select OPTION.
ENTER
Select ISM Method.
ENTER
Select Normal, Orbiter, Color Wash,
or White Wash.
4
EXIT
Return to TV viewing.
ᯫ
ᯫ
ᯫ
ᯫ
Normal: If image sticking is never a
problem, ISM is not necessary - set
to Normal.
Orbiter: To avoid a ghost image on
the screen, the image will move every
2 minutes to help prevent ghost
images. However, it is best not to
allow any fixed image to remain on
the screen.
Color Wash: The color block with the
screen moved a little and the white
pattern are displayed. It is difficult to
see the after image on all colors.
Once it has been corrected it will not
be visible in any color.
White Wash: White Wash removes
ghost images from the screen. Use
sparingly. Watch the TV normally for
a while before using this feature to
see if the ghost image disappears on
its own.
PICTURE CONTROL
3
MENU
! NOTE
ŹAn excessive ghosted image may be
impossible to clear entirely with White
Wash. To return to normal viewing, press
the any button.
143
SOUND
SOUND &&LANGUAGE
LANGUAGE
CONTROL
CONTROL
AUTO VOLUME
Auto Volume makes sure that the volume level remains consistent whether you are watching a commercial or a regular TV program.
Because each broadcasting station has its own signal conditions, volume adjustment may be needed
every time the channel is changed. This feature allows users to enjoy stable volume levels by making
automatic adjustments for each program.
$8',2
1
2
SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL
144
3
ᯒ0RYHᯙ(QWHU
ؒ $XWR9ROXPH
2II
ؒ &OHDU9RLFH,,
2IIᰕ
ؒ %DODQFH
ᯙ
ᯱ
2Q
ؒ &OHDU9RLFH,,
2IIᰕ
ؒ %DODQFH
۳2II
ᯡ2Q
/
6WDQGDUG
ؒ 6RXQG0RGH
6WDQGDUG
ؒ,QILQLWH6RXQG2II
ؒ,QILQLWH6RXQG2II
ؒ7UHEOH
ؒ7UHEOH
ؒ%DVV
ؒ%DVV
ؒ5H
5 VHWW
5
5H
ؒ5H
5 VHWW
5
5H
ENTER
Select Auto Volume.
ENTER
Select On or Off.
EXIT
ؒ $XWR9ROXPH
Select AUDIO.
BACK
5
ᯒ0RYHᯙ(QWHU
ؒ 6RXQG0RGH
MENU
4
/
$8',2
Return to the previous menu.
Return to TV viewing.
ᯰ
ᯙ
5
CLEAR VOICE II
By differentiating the human sound range from others, it improves the sound quality of voices.
$8',2
1
2
3
ᯒ0RYHᯙ(QWHU
ؒ $XWR9ROXPH
2II
ؒ &OHDU9RLFH,,
2IIᰕ
ؒ %DODQFH
ؒ 6RXQG0RGH
6WDQGDUG
2II
ؒ &OHDU9RLFH,,
2IIᰕ
ؒ %DODQFH
ؒ 6RXQG0RGH
6WDQGDUG
ؒ,QILQLWH6RXQG2II
ؒ,QILQLWH6RXQG2II
ؒ7UHEOH
ؒ7UHEOH
ؒ%DVV
ؒ%DVV
ؒ5H
5 VHWW
5H
ؒ5H
5 VHWW
5H
/
Select AUDIO.
ENTER
Select Clear Voice II.
ENTER
Select On or Off.
5
Select Level.
Make appropriate adjustments.
6
BACK
EXIT
Return to the previous menu.
ؒ&OHDU9RLFH,,
/
5
ؒ/HYHOᰕ
‫܁‬2II‫۽‬
&ORVH
SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL
Adjustment for Clear Voice Level
with selecting On
5
ᯒ0RYHᯙ(QWHU
ؒ $XWR9ROXPH
ᯙ
ᯐ
MENU
4
$8',2
Return to TV viewing.
145
SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL
BALANCE
Adjust the left/right sound of speaker to suit your taste and room situations.
$8',2
1
2
SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL
146
3
ᯒ0RYHᯙ(QWHU
2II
ؒ $XWR9ROXPH
ؒ &OHDU9RLFH,,
2IIᰕ
ؒ &OHDU9RLFH,,
2IIᰕ
ؒ %DODQFH
ؒ %DODQFH
/
ᯐ
5 ᯙ
ؒ %DODQFH ‫܁‬
5 ᯙ
/
6WDQGDUG
ؒ 6RXQG0RGH
6WDQGDUG
ؒ,QILQLWH6RXQG2II
ؒ,QILQLWH6RXQG2II
ؒ7UHEOH
ؒ7UHEOH
ؒ%DVV
ؒ%DVV
ؒ5H
5
5H
5 VHWW
ؒ5H
5
5H
5 VHWW
ENTER
Select Balance.
ENTER
Make appropriate adjustments.
EXIT
2II
ؒ 6RXQG0RGH
Select AUDIO.
BACK
ᯒ0RYHᯙ(QWHU
ؒ $XWR9ROXPH
MENU
4
$8',2
Return to the previous menu.
Return to TV viewing.
&ORVH
/
5
‫۽‬
PRESET SOUND SETTINGS (SOUND MODE)
Sound Mode lets you enjoy the best sound without any special adjustment using factory presets.
$8',2
1
2
$8',2
ؒ $XWR9ROXPH
2II
ؒ $XWR9ROXPH
2II
ؒ &OHDU9RLFH,,
2IIᰕ
ؒ &OHDU9RLFH,,
2IIᰕ
ؒ %DODQFH
ؒ %DODQFH
ؒ 6RXQG0RGH
6WDQGDUG
ؒ 6RXQG0RGH
6WDQGDUG
ؒ,QILQLWH6RXQG2II
ؒ7UHEOH
ؒ%DVV
ؒ5H
5
5H
5 VHWW
/
5
ᯙ
ᯐ
MENU
Select AUDIO.
ENTER
Select Sound Mode.
ENTER
Select Standard, Music, Cinema,
Sport, or Game.
ᯫ
ᯫ
ᯫ
ᯫ
4
BACK
EXIT
ᯒ0RYHᯙ(QWHU
Return to the previous menu.
Return to TV viewing.
ᯫ
ᯫ
ᯫ
/
ᯡ6WDQGDUG
۳0XVLF
ؒ,QILQLWH6RXQG2II
۳&LQHPD
ؒ7UHEOH
۳6SRUW
ؒ%DVV
۳*DPH
ؒ5H
5
5H
5HVHWW
5
ᯙ
ᯱ
Standard, Music, Cinema, Sport, and
Game are preset for optimum sound
quality at the factory.
You can also adjust Sound Mode in
the Q.MENU.
Standard: Offers standard-quality
sound.
Music: Optimizes sound for listening
to music.
Cinema: Optimizes sound for watching movies.
Sport: Optimizes sound for watching
sports events.
Game: Optimizes sound for playing
games.
SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL
3
ᯒ0RYHᯙ(QWHU
147
SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL
SOUND SETTING ADJUSTMENT - USER MODE
Adjust the sound to suit your taste and room situations.
$8',2
ᯒ0RYHᯙ(QWHU
$8',2
ᯒ0RYHᯙ(QWHU
ؒ $XWR9ROXPH
2II
ؒ $XWR9ROXPH
2II
ؒ &OHDU9RLFH,,
2IIᰕ
ؒ &OHDU9RLFH,,
2IIᰕ
ؒ %DODQFH
ؒ %DODQFH
ؒ 6RXQG0RGH
6WDQGDUG
ؒ 6RXQG0RGH
6WDQGDUG
ؒ,QILQLWH6RXQG2II
ؒ7UHEOH
ؒ%DVV
ؒ5H
5
5H
5 VHWW
/
5
ᯙ
ᯐ
/
5
ؒ,QILQLWH6RXQG
ؒ,QILQLWH6RXQG2II
ؒ7UHEOH
ؒ%DVV
ؒ5H
5
5H
5 VHWW
2II
ؒ7UHEOH
ؒ%DVV
‫܁‬
‫۽‬
&ORVH
1
2
3
4
SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL
148
5
MENU
Select AUDIO.
ENTER
Select Sound Mode.
ENTER
Select Standard, Music, Cinema,
Sport, or Game.
ENTER
Select Infinite Sound, Treble, or Bass.
ENTER
Make appropriate adjustments.
6
BACK
EXIT
Return to the previous menu.
Return to TV viewing.
ᯫ
ᯫ
ᯫ
If sound quality or volume is not at
the level you want, it is recommended
to use a separate home theater system or amp to cope with different
user environments.
If you select “Clear Voice II-On”, the
Infinite Sound feature will not operate.
Infinite Sound: Infinite Sound is a
patented LG proprietary sound processing technology that strives
immersive 5.1 surround sound with
just two front speakers.
AUDIO RESET
Settings of the selected Sound Mode return to the default factory settings.
$8',2
ᯒ0RYHᯙ(QWHU
ؒ &O
&OHDU9R
U9RL
9 LFH
9
L ,,
LFH,,
,
2I
2 I
2I
Iᰕ
ᰕ
ᰕ
ؒ %DODQFH
ؒ 6RXQG0RGH
6WDQGDUG
ؒ 796SHDNHU
3
4
ؒ5HVHW
<HV
2Q
MENU
Select AUDIO.
ENTER
Select Reset.
ENTER
Select Yes.
ENTER
EXIT
5
1R
Initialize the adjusted value.
Return to TV viewing.
ᯙ
ᯐ
ᯒ0RYHᯙ(QWHU
ؒ &O
&OHDU9R
U9RL
9 LFH
9
L ,,
LFH,,
,
2I
2 I
2I
Iᰕ
ᰕ
ؒ %DODQFH
ؒ 6RXQG0RGH
6WDQGDUG
ؒ,QILQLWH6RXQG2II
L 5HVHWWLQJDXGLRFRQILJXUDWLRQ
ؒ7UHEOH
ؒ%DVV
ؒ5HVHW
ؒ 796SHDNHU
2Q
/
5
SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL
2
/
ؒ,QILQLWH6RXQG2II
" $OODXGLRVHWWLQJVZLOOEHUHVHWWHG
ؒ7UHEOH
&RQWLQXH"
ؒ%DVV
1
$8',2
149
SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL
TV SPEAKERS ON/OFF SETUP
If you wish to use an external Hi-Fi system, turn off the TV’s internal speakers.
$8',2
1
2
SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL
150
3
ᯒ0RYHᯙ(QWHU
ؒ &O
&OHDU9R
U9RL
9 LFH
9
L ,,
LFH,,
,
2I
2 I
2I
Iᰕ
ᰕ
ᰕ
ؒ %DODQFH
ؒ 6RXQG0RGH
6WDQGDUG
2I
2 I
2I
Iᰕ
ᰕ
ᰕ
ؒ %DODQFH
ؒ 6RXQG0RGH
6WDQGDUG
ؒ,QILQLWH6RXQG2II
ؒ,QILQLWH6RXQG2II
ؒ7UHEOH
ؒ7UHEOH
ؒ%DVV
ؒ%DVV
ؒ5HVHW
ؒ5HVHW
ؒ 796SHDNHU
2Q
ؒ 796SHDNHU
2Q
Select AUDIO.
ENTER
Select TV Speaker.
ENTER
Select On or Off.
BACK
EXIT
ᯒ0RYHᯙ(QWHU
ؒ &O
&OHDU9R
U9RL
9 LFH
9
L ,,
LFH,,
,
MENU
4
$8',2
/
Return to the previous menu.
Return to TV viewing.
5
ᯰ
ᯙ
/
۳2II
ᯡ2Q
5
ᯰ
ᯙ
STEREO/SAP BROADCAST SETUP
On analog signals, this TV can receive MTS stereo programs and any SAP (Secondary Audio
Program) that accompanies the stereo program if the station transmits an additional sound signal.
Mono sound is automatically used if the broadcast is only in Mono.
‫܁‬0XOWL$XGLR‫۽‬
(QJOLVKᯙ
A
ᰙ([LW
Analog TV
2
Q.MENU
Select SAP.
ENTER
Select Mono, Stereo, or
SAP.
3
EXIT
Return to TV viewing.
1
2
Q.MENU
Select Multi Audio.
ENTER
Select other languages.
3
EXIT
Return to TV viewing.
SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL
1
Digital TV
151
SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL
AUDIO LANGUAGE
This feature operates only in DTV/Cable DTV mode.
237,21
ᯒ0RYHᯙ(QWHU
ؒ /DQJXDJH
ؒ &DSWLRQ
ᯙ
2II
ؒ 3RZHU,QGLFDWRU
SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL
152
2
3
ؒ 6HW,'
ؒ 0RGH6HWWLQJ
+RPH8VH
ؒ 0RGH6HWWLQJ
+RPH8VH
Select Language.
ENTER
Select Audio Language.
Select your desired language.
EXIT
2II
ؒ ,QLWLDO6HWWLQJ
ENTER
BACK
ؒ &DSWLRQ
Select OPTION.
5
ؒ /DQJXDJH
ؒ 6HW,'
MENU
4
ᯒ0RYHᯙ(QWHU
ؒ 3RZHU,QGLFDWRU
ؒ ,QLWLDO6HWWLQJ
1
ᯱ
237,21
Return to the previous menu.
Return to TV viewing.
0HQX/DQJXDJH
(QJOLVK
$XGLR/DQJXDJH
‫(܁‬QJOLVK‫۽‬
&ORVH
ON-SCREEN MENUS LANGUAGE SELECTION
The menus can be shown on the screen in the selected language.
237,21
ᯒ0RYHᯙ(QWHU
ؒ /DQJXDJH
ؒ &DSWLRQ
1
2
ᯱ
ؒ ,QLWLDO6HWWLQJ
ؒ ,QLWLDO6HWWLQJ
ؒ 6HW,'
ؒ 0RGH6HWWLQJ
+RPH8VH
ؒ 0RGH6HWWLQJ
+RPH8VH
Select Language.
ENTER
Select Menu Language.
Select your desired language.
From this point on, the on-screen menus
will be shown in the selected language.
EXIT
2II
ؒ 6HW,'
ENTER
BACK
ؒ &DSWLRQ
ؒ 3RZHU,QGLFDWRU
Select OPTION.
5
ؒ /DQJXDJH
ؒ 3RZHU,QGLFDWRU
MENU
4
ᯒ0RYHᯙ(QWHU
Return to the previous menu.
Return to TV viewing.
0HQX/DQJXDJH
‫(܁‬QJOLVK‫۽‬
$XGLR/DQJXDJH
(QJOLVK
&ORVH
SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL
3
ᯙ
2II
237,21
153
SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL
CAPTION MODE
Analog Broadcasting System Captions
Captions are provided to help the hearing impaired watch TV. Select a caption mode for displaying
captioning information if provided on a program. Analog caption displays information at any position
on the screen and is usually the program's dialog. Caption/Text, if provided by the broadcaster, would
be available for both digital and analog channels on the Antenna/Cable. This TV is programmed to
memorize the caption/text mode which was last set when you turned the power off. This function is
only available when Caption Mode is set On.
237,21
ᯒ0RYHᯙ(QWHU
ؒ /DQJXDJH
ؒ &DSWLRQ
1
SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL
154
2
3
&&
ؒ ,QLWLDO6HWWLQJ
ؒ ,QLWLDO6HWWLQJ
ؒ 6HW,'
ؒ 0RGH6HWWLQJ
+RPH8VH
ؒ 0RGH6HWWLQJ
+RPH8VH
ENTER
Select On.
Select CC1-4 or Text1-4.
Return to the previous menu.
Return to TV viewing.
ᯫ
ᯫ
ᯫ
‫܁‬2Q‫۽‬
0RGH
ؒ 6HW,'
Select Caption.
EXIT
ؒ &DSWLRQ
ؒ 3RZHU,QGLFDWRU
ENTER
BACK
ᯙ
ᯐ
ؒ 3RZHU,QGLFDWRU
Select OPTION.
5
ᯒ0RYHᯙ(QWHU
ؒ /DQJXDJH
2II
MENU
4
237,21
&&
'LJLWDO2SWLRQ
&ORVH
When selecting Off, Sub-menus for
Analog, DTV, and Digital Option
become disabled.
Caption
The term for the words that scroll
across the bottom of the TV screen;
usually the audio portion of the program provided for the hearing
impaired.
Text
The term for the words that appear in
a large black frame and almost cover
the entire screen; usually messages
provided by the broadcaster.
Digital Broadcasting System Captions
Choose the language you want the DTV/Cable DTV Captions to appear in.
Other Languages can be chosen for digital sources only if they are included on the program.
This function in only available when Caption Mode is set On.
237,21
ᯒ0RYHᯙ(QWHU
ؒ /DQJXDJH
ؒ &DSWLRQ
1
3
ؒ /DQJXDJH
2II
ᯙ
ᯐ
ؒ 3RZHU,QGLFDWRU
ؒ ,QLWLDO6HWWLQJ
ؒ ,QLWLDO6HWWLQJ
ؒ 6HW,'
+RPH8VH
ؒ 0RGH6HWWLQJ
+RPH8VH
Select Caption.
ENTER
Select On.
Select CC1-4, Text1-4, or Service1 - 6.
EXIT
Return to the previous menu.
Return to TV viewing.
‫܁‬2Q‫۽‬
0RGH
ؒ 0RGH6HWWLQJ
ENTER
BACK
&&
ؒ 6HW,'
Select OPTION.
5
ؒ &DSWLRQ
ؒ 3RZHU,QGLFDWRU
MENU
4
ᯒ0RYHᯙ(QWHU
&&
'LJLWDO2SWLRQ
&ORVH
SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL
2
237,21
155
SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL
Caption Option
Customize the DTV/Cable DTV captions that appear on your screen.
This function in only available when Caption Mode is set On.
‫&܁‬XVWRP‫۽‬
237,21
ؒ /DQJXDJH
ؒ &DSWLRQ
6L]H
ᯒ0RYHᯙ(QWHU
&&
ؒ 3RZHU,QGLFDWRU
ؒ 0RGH6HWWLQJ
+RPH8VH
۲:KLWH
7H[W2SDFLW\
&&
6ROLG
%J&RORU
ؒ ,QLWLDO6HWWLQJ
ؒ 6HW,'
)RQW
7H[W&RORU
‫܁‬2Q‫۽‬
ᯙ
0RGH
$6WDQGDUG
)RQW
'LJLWDO2SWLRQ
&ORVH
۲%ODFN
%J2SDFLW\
6ROLG
(GJH7\SH
1RQH
(GJH&RORU
۲%ODFN
&ORVH
1
MENU
Select OPTION.
ᯫ
ᯫ
2
ᯫ
ENTER
Select Caption.
ᯫ
SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL
3
ENTER
4
5
Select Digital Option.
ᯫ
ᯫ
ᯫ
ENTER
Select Custom.
Customize the Size, Font, etc., to your
preference. A preview icon is provided
at the bottom of the screen, use it to
see the caption language.
6
7
BACK
EXIT
156
Select On.
Return to the previous menu.
Return to TV viewing.
ᯫ
Size: Set the word size.
Font: Select a typeface for the text.
Text Color: Choose a color for the
text.
Text Opacity: Specify the opacity for
the text color.
Bg (Background) Color: Select a
background color.
Bg (Background) Opacity: Select the
opacity for the background color.
Edge Type: Select an edge type.
Edge Color: Select a color for the
edges.
TIME SETTING
CLOCK SETTING
Auto Clock Setup
The time is set automatically from a digital channel signal.
The digital channel signal includes information for the current time provided by the broadcasting station.
Set the clock manually if the current time is set incorrectly by the auto clock function.
7,0(
ᯒ0RYHᯙ(QWHU
ؒ &ORFN
7,0(
ᯒ0RYHᯙ(QWHU
ؒ &ORFN
ؒ 2II7LPH
2II
2II
ؒ 2Q7,PH
2II
2II
ؒ 6OHHS7LPHU
2II
ᯙ
ؒ 2II7LPH
2II
ؒ 2Q7,PH
ؒ 6OHHS7LPHU
ᯱ
ᯙ
‫܁‬$XWR‫۽‬
0RQWK
'DWH
<HDU
+RXU
$0
0LQXWH
7LPH=RQH
(DVWHUQ
'D\OLJKW6DYLQJ
$XWR
&ORVH
1
2
Select TIME.
ENTER
Select Clock.
ENTER
Select Auto.
4
Select your viewing area time zone.
USA: Eastern, Central, Mountain,
Pacific, Alaska, or Hawaii.
Canada: Eastern, Central, Mountain,
Pacific, New Foundland, or Atlantic.
5
Select Auto, Off, or On (depending
on whether or not your viewing area
observes Daylight Saving time).
6
BACK
EXIT
TIME SETTING
3
MENU
Return to the previous menu.
Return to TV viewing.
157
TIME SETTING
Manual Clock Setup
If the current time setting is wrong, reset the clock manually.
7,0(
ᯒ0RYHᯙ(QWHU
ؒ &ORFN
ᯙ
ؒ 2II7LPH
2II
ؒ 2Q7,PH
2II
ؒ 6OHHS7LPHU
ᯱ
2II
7,0(
ᯒ0RYHᯙ(QWHU
ؒ &ORFN
ؒ 2II7LPH
2II
ؒ 2Q7,PH
2II
ؒ 6OHHS7LPHU
2II
‫܁‬0DQXDO‫۽‬
ᯙ
0RQWK
'DWH
<HDU
+RXU
$0
0LQXWH
7LPH=RQH
(DVWHUQ
'D\OLJKW6DYLQJ
$XWR
&ORVH
1
2
3
TIME SETTING
MENU
Select TIME.
ENTER
Select Clock.
ENTER
Select Manual.
4
Select the Year, Month, Date, Hour, or Minute
option.
5
Set the Year, Month, Date, Hour, or Minute
option.
6
BACK
EXIT
158
Return to the previous menu.
Return to TV viewing.
AUTO ON/OFF TIME SETTING
This function operates only if the current time has been set.
The Off Time function overrides the On Time function if they are both set to the same time.
The TV must be in standby mode for the On Time to work.
If you do not press any button within 2 hours after the TV turns on with the On Time function, the TV
will automatically revert to standby mode.
7,0(
ᯒ0RYHᯙ(QWHU
ؒ &ORFN
7,0(
ᯒ0RYHᯙ(QWHU
ؒ &ORFN
ؒ 2II7LPH
2II
ؒ 2Q7,PH
2II
ؒ 6OHHS7LPHU
2II
ᯙ
ᯐ
ᯞ)HE$0
ؒ 2II7LPH
2II
ؒ 2Q7,PH
$02QFH
5HSHDW
2II
+RXU
ؒ 6OHHS7LPHU
ᯙ
‫܁‬2QFH‫۽‬
$0
0LQXWH
,QSXW
79
&KDQQHO
79
9ROXPH
&ORVH
1
2
Select TIME.
ᯫ
ENTER
ENTER
4
Select Off Time or On Time.
1
Select Repeat.
2
Select Off, Once, Daily, Mon.~Fri.,
Mon.~Sat., Sat.~ Sun., or Sun..
5
Select and set Hour or Minute.
6
BACK
EXIT
To cancel On/Off Time function, select
Off.
Only for On Time function
3
4
Select Input.
Select the desired input source.
When Selecting TV:
set the channel at turn-on.
TIME SETTING
3
ᯫ
MENU
Adjust to sound level at
turn-on.
Return to the previous menu.
Return to TV viewing.
159
TIME SETTING
SLEEP TIMER SETTING
The Sleep Timer turns the TV off at the preset time.
Note that this setting is cleared when the TV is turned off.
7,0(
ᯒ0RYHᯙ(QWHU
ؒ &ORFN
7,0(
ᯒ0RYHᯙ(QWHU
ؒ &ORFN
ؒ 2II7LPH
2II
ؒ 2II7LPH
2II
ؒ 2Q7,PH
2II
ؒ 2Q7,PH
2II
ؒ 6OHHS7LPHU
2II
ؒ 6OHHS7LPHU
2II
ᯰ
ᯙ
ᯡ2II
۳PLQ
۳PLQ
ᯙ
ᯱ
ᯙ
۳PLQ
۳PLQ
۳PLQ
۳PLQ
۳PLQ
۳PLQ
1
MENU
Select TIME.
ᯫ
ᯫ
2
3
ENTER
Select Sleep Timer.
ENTER
Make appropriate adjustments.
4
BACK
TIME SETTING
160
EXIT
Return to the previous menu.
Return to TV viewing.
To cancel the Sleep Timer, select Off.
You can also adjust Sleep Timer in
the Q.MENU.
PARENTAL CONTROL / RATINGS
Parental Control can be used to block specific channels, ratings and other viewing sources.
The Parental Control Function (V-Chip) is used to block program viewing based on the ratings sent by
the broadcasting station. The default setting is to allow all programs to be viewed. Viewing can be
blocked by choosing the type of the program and the categories. It is also possible to block all program viewing for a time period. To use this function, the following must be done :
1. Set ratings and categories to be blocked.
2. Specify a password
3. Enable the lock
V-Chip rating and categories
Rating guidelines are provided by broadcasting stations. Most television programs and television movies can be blocked by TV Rating and/or Individual Categories. Movies that have been shown at the
theaters or direct-to-video movies use the Movie Rating System (MPAA) only.
Ratings for Television programs including made-for-TV movies:
TV-G (General audience)
ᯫ TV-PG (Parental guidance suggested)
ᯫ TV-14 (Parents strongly cautioned)
ᯫ TV-MA (Mature audience only)
ᯫ TV-Y
(All children)
ᯫ TV-Y7 (Children 7 years older)
ᯫ
SET PASSWORD & LOCK SYSTEM
Setting up Your Password
Set up blocking schemes to block specific channels, ratings, and external viewing sources.
A password is required to gain access to this menu.
For Canada
For USA
/2&.
ؒ 6HW3DVVZRUG
1
MENU
ᯙ
ؒ /RFN6\VWHP
2Q
ᯱ
/2&.
ᯒ0RYHᯙ(QWHU
ؒ 6HW3DVVZRUG
ᯙ
ᯱ
ؒ /RFN6\VWHP
2Q
ؒ%ORFN&KDQQHO
ؒ%ORFN&KDQQHO
ؒ0RYLH5DWLQJ
ؒ795DWLQJ(QJOLVK
ؒ795DWLQJ&KLOGUHQ
ؒ795DWLQJ)UHQFK
ؒ795DWLQJ*HQHUDO
ؒ'RZQORDGDEOH5DWLQJ
ؒ'RZQORDGDEOH5DWLQJ
ؒ,QSXW%ORFN
ؒ,QSX
,QSX
S W%O
RFNN
ؒ .H\/RFN
2II
ENTER
Select LOCK.
ᯫ
ᯫ
2
1
2 ABC 3 DEF
4 GHI 5 JKL 6 MNO
7PQRS 8 TUV 9 WXYZ
0
Input the password.
ᯫ
(QWHU3DVVZRUG
&ORVH
Enter the password as requested.
The TV is set up with the initial
password “0-0-0-0”.
If you forget your password, press
“0-3-2-5” on the remote control.
PARENTAL CONTROL / RATING
ᯒ0RYHᯙ(QWHU
161
PARENTAL CONTROL / RATINGS
Set Password
Change the password by inputting a new password twice.
/2&.
ᯒ0RYHᯙ(QWHU
ؒ 6HW3DVVZRUG
1
2
1
7PQRS 8 TUV 9 WXYZ
4
1
2 ABC 3 DEF
4 GHI 5 JKL 6 MNO
7PQRS 8 TUV 9 WXYZ
0
PARENTAL CONTROL / RATING
162
5
BACK
EXIT
ؒ%ORFN&KDQQHO
ؒ0RYLH5DWLQJ
ؒ0RYLH5DWLQJ
ؒ795DWLQJ&KLOGUHQ
ؒ795DWLQJ&KLOGUHQ
ؒ795DWLQJ*HQHUDO
ؒ795DWLQJ*HQHUDO
ؒ'RZQORDGDEOH5DWLQJ
ؒ'RZQORDGDEOH5DWLQJ
ؒ,QSX
,QSX
S W%O
%ORFNN
ؒ,QSX
,QSX
S W%O
%ORFNN
Select Set Password.
ENTER
ؒ%ORFN&KDQQHO
Input the password.
Choose any 4 digits for your new
password.
As soon as the 4 digits are entered,
re-enter the same 4 digits on the
Confirm.
Return to the previous menu.
Return to TV viewing.
2Q
&RQILUP
Select LOCK.
ؒ /RFN6\VWHP
1HZ
0
3
ؒ 6HW3DVVZRUG
2Q
2 ABC 3 DEF
4 GHI 5 JKL 6 MNO
ᯒ0RYHᯙ(QWHU
ؒ /RFN6\VWHP
ENTER
MENU
ᯙ
ᯱ
/2&.
&ORVH
Lock System
Enables or disables the blocking scheme you set up previously.
/2&.
ᯒ0RYHᯙ(QWHU
ؒ 6HW3DVVZRUG
1
MENU
2
1
/2&.
ᯒ0RYHᯙ(QWHU
ؒ 6HW3DVVZRUG
ؒ /RFN6\VWHP
2Q
ᯙ
ᯐ
2Q
ؒ%ORFN&KDQQHO
ؒ%ORFN&KDQQHO
ؒ0RYLH5DWLQJ
ؒ0RYLH5DWLQJ
ؒ795DWLQJ&KLOGUHQ
ؒ795DWLQJ&KLOGUHQ
ؒ795DWLQJ*HQHUDO
ؒ795DWLQJ*HQHUDO
ؒ'RZQORDGDEOH5DWLQJ
ؒ'RZQORDGDEOH5DWLQJ
ؒ,QSX
,QSX
S W%O
%ORFNN
ؒ,QSX
,QSX
S W%O
%ORFNN
ENTER
Select LOCK.
ᯫ
۳2II
ؒ /RFN6\VWHP
ᯡ2Q
ᯙ
ᯰ
ᯙ
When you select On, the Lock
System is enable.
2 ABC 3 DEF
4 GHI 5 JKL 6 MNO
7PQRS 8 TUV 9 WXYZ
Input the password.
0
3
4
Select Lock System.
ENTER
5
BACK
Return to the previous menu.
Return to TV viewing.
PARENTAL CONTROL / RATING
EXIT
Select On or Off.
163
PARENTAL CONTROL / RATINGS
CHANNEL BLOCKING
Blocks any channels that you do not want to watch or that you do not want your children to watch.
%ORFN&KDQQHO
/2&.
ᯒ0RYHᯙ(QWHU
ؒ 6HW3DVVZRUG
)DYRULWH*URXS
'79
3-1
ؒ /RFN6\VWHP
2Q
ؒ%ORFN&KDQQHO
ؒ0RYLH5DWLQJ
ؒ795DWLQJ&KLOGUHQ
ؒ795DWLQJ*HQHUDO
ؒ'RZQORDGDEOH5DWLQJ
ؒ,,QSX
ؒ
,QSX
S W%O
%ORFNN
$
79
SDJH
&DEOH'79
&DEOH79
5-1
7-1
ᯙ
ᯐ
ᯙ&+&KDQJH
ᯒ1DYLJDWLRQ
᱇3DJH&KDQJH
ᰙ3UHYLRXV
ᯕ%ORFN8QEORFN
1
MENU
2
1
ENTER
Select LOCK.
2 ABC 3 DEF
4 GHI 5 JKL 6 MNO
7PQRS 8 TUV 9 WXYZ
Input the password.
0
3
4
Select Block Channel.
ENTER
5
YELLOW
6
BACK
PARENTAL CONTROL / RATING
164
EXIT
Select a channel to block or unblock.
Block or unblock a channel.
Return to the previous menu.
Return to TV viewing.
ᯫ
If a channel is locked, enter the
password to unlock it temporarily.
MOVIE & TV RATING
Movie Rating (MPAA)- For USA
Blocks movies according to the movie ratings limits specified, so children cannot view certain movies.
You can set the ratings limit by blocking out all the movies with the ratings above a specified level.
Keep in mind that the movie ratings limit only applies to movies shown on TV, not TV programs, such
as soap operas.
/2&.
ᯒ0RYHᯙ(QWHU
ؒ 6HW3DVVZRUG
/2&.
ᯒ0RYHᯙ(QWHU
ؒ 6HW3DVVZRUG
ؒ /RFN6\VWHP
2Q
ؒ /RFN6\VWHP
ؒ%ORFN&KDQQHO
%ORFNLQJRII3HUPLWVDOO
SURJUDPV
ؒ%ORFN&KDQQHO
ؒ0RYLH5DWLQJ
ؒ0RYLH5DWLQJ* ؒ795DWLQJ&KLOGUHQ
ؒ795DWLQJ&KLOGUHQ
3*
ؒ795DWLQJ*HQHUDO
ؒ795DWLQJ*HQHUDO
3*
ؒ'RZQORDGDEOH5DWLQJ
ؒ'RZQORDGDEOH5DWLQJ
5
ؒ,QSX
,QSX
S W%O
%ORFNN
ؒ,QSX
,QSX
S W%O
%ORFNN 1&
ᯙ
ᯐ
2Q
ᯙ
;
%ORFNLQJ2IIᯣ
1
MENU
2
1
ENTER
Select LOCK.
2 ABC 3 DEF
4 GHI 5 JKL 6 MNO
7PQRS 8 TUV 9 WXYZ
Input the password.
0
3
4
ᯫ
ᯫ
ᯫ
ᯫ
Select Movie Rating.
ᯫ
ᯫ
ENTER
Select G, PG, PG-13, R, NC-17, X, or
Blocking Off.
ᯫ
ᯫ
5
EXIT
Return to the previous menu.
Return to TV viewing.
ᯫ
PARENTAL CONTROL / RATING
BACK
If Movie Rating, TV Rating-Children
or TV Rating-General is locked, enter
the password to unlock it temporarily.
G (General audience)
PG (Parental guidance suggested)
PG-13 (Parents strongly cautioned)
R (Restricted)
NC-17 (No one 17 and under admitted)
X (Adult only)
Blocking Off (Permits all programs)
If you set PG-13: G and PG movies
will be available, PG-13, R, NC-17 and
X will be blocked.
165
PARENTAL CONTROL / RATINGS
TV Rating Children - For USA
Prevents children from watching certain children's TV programs, according to the ratings limit set. The
children rating does not apply to other TV programs. Unless you block certain TV programs intended
for mature audiences in the TV Rating - sub menu, your children can view those programs.
/2&.
ᯒ0RYHᯙ(QWHU
ؒ 6HW3DVVZRUG
1
MENU
/2&.
ᯒ0RYHᯙ(QWHU
ؒ 6HW3DVVZRUG
ؒ /RFN6\VWHP
2Q
ؒ /RFN6\VWHP
ؒ%ORFN&KDQQHO
ؒ%ORFN&KDQQHO
ؒ0RYLH5DWLQJ
ؒ0RYLH5DWLQJ
ؒ795DWLQJ&KLOGUHQ
ؒ795DWLQJ*HQHUDO
ؒ795DWLQJ*HQHUDO
ؒ'RZQORDGDEOH5DWLQJ
ؒ'RZQORDGDEOH5DWLQJ
ؒ,
ؒ
,QSX
,QSX
S W%O
%ORFNN
ؒ,
ؒ
,QSX
,QSX
S W%O
%ORFNN
ENTER
ᯙ
ᯐ
Select LOCK.
1
2 ABC 3 DEF
4 GHI 5 JKL 6 MNO
7PQRS 8 TUV 9 WXYZ
Input the password.
0
3
4
5
PARENTAL CONTROL / RATING
166
Select TV Rating-Children.
ENTER
Select Age or Fantasy Violence.
ENTER
Select block options.
6
BACK
EXIT
Return to the previous menu.
Return to TV viewing.
$JHᯙ
)DQWDV\9LROHQFH
ؒ795DWLQJ&KLOGUHQ
ᯙ
ᯫ
ᯫ
2
2Q
&ORVH
Age (applies to TV-Y, TV-Y7)
Fantasy Violence (applies to TV-Y7)
TV Rating General - For USA
Based on the ratings, blocks certain TV programs that you and your family do not want to view.
/2&.
ᯒ0RYHᯙ(QWHU
ؒ 6HW3DVVZRUG
/2&.
ᯒ0RYHᯙ(QWHU
ؒ 6HW3DVVZRUG
ؒ /RFN6\VWHP
2Q
ؒ /RFN6\VWHP
ؒ%ORFN&KDQQHO
ؒ%ORFN&KDQQHO $JHᯙ
ؒ0RYLH5DWLQJ
ؒ0RYLH5DWLQJ
ؒ795DWLQJ&KLOGUHQ
ؒ795DWLQJ&KLOGUHQ
/DQJXDJH
ؒ795DWLQJ*HQHUDO
ؒ795DWLQJ*HQHUDO
6H[
ؒ'RZQORDGDEOH5DWLQJ
ؒ'RZQORDGDEOH5DWLQJ
9LROHQFH
ؒ,,QSX
ؒ
,QSX
S W%O
%ORFNN
ؒ,,QSX
ؒ
,QSX
S W%O
%ORFNN
ᯙ
ᯐ
2Q
'LDORJXH
ᯙ
&ORVH
1
MENU
2
1
ENTER
Select LOCK.
ᯫ
2 ABC 3 DEF
4 GHI 5 JKL 6 MNO
7PQRS 8 TUV 9 WXYZ
Input the password.
ᯫ
0
3
ᯫ
Select TV Rating-General.
ᯫ
4
5
ENTER
Select Age, Dialogue, Language, Sex
or Violence.
ENTER
Select block options.
BACK
EXIT
Return to the previous menu.
Return to TV viewing.
PARENTAL CONTROL / RATING
6
ᯫ
Age (applies to TV-G,T V-PG,T V14,TV-MA).
Dialogue-sexual dialogue (applies to
TV-PG,TV-14).
Language-adult language (applies to
TV-PG, TV-14, TV-MA).
Sex-sexual situations (applies to
TV-PG, TV-14, TV-MA).
Violence (applies to TV-PG, TV-14,
TV-MA).
167
PARENTAL CONTROL / RATINGS
TV Rating English - For CANADA
Selecting Canadian English rating system.
/2&.
ᯒ0RYHᯙ(QWHU
ؒ 6HW3DVVZRUG
/2&.
ᯒ0RYHᯙ(QWHU
ؒ 6HW3DVVZRUG
ؒ /RFN6\VWHP
2Q
ؒ%ORFN&KDQQHO
ؒ795DWLQJ(QJOLVK
ؒ /RFN6\VWHP
2Q
%ORFNLQJRII3HUPLWVDOO
SURJUDPV
ؒ%ORFN&KDQQHO
ؒ795DWLQJ(QJOLVK
ؒ795DWLQJ)UHQFK
ؒ795DWLQJ)UHQFK
ؒ'RZQORDGDEOH5DWLQJ
ؒ'RZQORDGDEOH5DWLQJ
ؒ,QSXW%ORFN
ؒ,QSXW%ORFN
ؒ .H\/RFN
2II
ؒ .H\/RFN
2II
ᯙ
ᯐ
(
&
&
*
3*
%ORFNLQJ2IIᯣ
1
MENU
2
1
ENTER
Select LOCK.
ᯫ
2 ABC 3 DEF
4 GHI 5 JKL 6 MNO
7PQRS 8 TUV 9 WXYZ
Input the password.
0
ᯫ
ᯫ
3
Select TV Rating-English.
ᯫ
ᯫ
4
ENTER
Select E, C, C8+, G, PG, 14+, 18+, or
Blocking Off.
ᯫ
ᯫ
5
BACK
PARENTAL CONTROL / RATING
168
EXIT
Return to the previous menu.
Return to TV viewing.
ᯫ
ᯫ
If TV Rating-English or TV RatingFrench is locked, enter the password
to unlocked it temporarily.
E (Exempt)
C (Children)
C8+ (Children eight years and older)
G (General programming, suitable
for all audiences)
PG (Parental Guidance)
14+ (Viewers 14 years and older)
18+ (Adult programming)
Blocking Off (Permits all programs)
TV Rating French - For CANADA
Selecting Canadian French rating system.
/2&.
ᯒ0RYHᯙ(QWHU
ؒ 6HW3DVVZRUG
/2&.
ᯒ0RYHᯙ(QWHU
ؒ 6HW3DVVZRUG
%ORFNLQJRII3HUPLWVDOO
SURJUDPV
ؒ /RFN6\VWHP
2Q
ؒ /RFN6\VWHP
2Q
ؒ%ORFN&KDQQHO
ؒ%ORFN&KDQQHO
ؒ795DWLQJ(QJOLVK
ؒ795DWLQJ(QJOLVK (
ؒ795DWLQJ)UHQFK
ؒ'RZQORDGDEOH5DWLQJ
ؒ795DWLQJ)UHQFK *
ؒ'RZQORDGDEOH5DWLQJDQV
ؒ,QSXW%ORFN
ؒ,QSXW%ORFN
DQV
ؒ .H\/RFN
2II
ؒ .H\/RFN
2II
DQV
ᯙ
ᯐ
DQV
%ORFNLQJ2IIᯣ
1
MENU
ENTER
Select LOCK.
ᯫ
ᯫ
2
1
ᯫ
2 ABC 3 DEF
4 GHI 5 JKL 6 MNO
7PQRS 8 TUV 9 WXYZ
Input the password.
0
3
4
ᯫ
Select TV Rating-French.
ENTER
Select E, G, 8ans+, 13ans+, 16ans+,
18ans+, or Blocking Off.
ᯫ
ᯫ
ᯫ
5
BACK
Return to the previous menu.
Return to TV viewing.
PARENTAL CONTROL / RATING
EXIT
E (Exempt)
G (General)
8ans+ (General-Not convenient for
little children)
13ans+ (Not convenient for children
of 13 years and younger)
16ans+ (Not convenient for children
of 16 years and younger)
18ans+ (This programs is only for
adults)
Blocking Off (Permits all programs)
169
PARENTAL CONTROL / RATINGS
DOWNLOADABLE RATING
This function is available only for digital channels.
This function operates only when TV has received Region5 Rating data.
/2&.
ᯒ0RYHᯙ(QWHU
ؒ 6HW3DVVZRUG
/2&.
ᯒ0RYHᯙ(QWHU
ؒ 6HW3DVVZRUG
ؒ /RFN6\VWHP
2Q
ؒ /RFN6\VWHP
ؒ%ORFN&KDQQHO
ؒ%ORFN&KDQQHO
ؒ0RYLH5DWLQJ
+XPRUᯙ
ؒ0RYLH5DWLQJ
ؒ795DWLQJ&KLOGUHQ
6SRUW
ؒ795DWLQJ&KLOGUHQ
ؒ795DWLQJ*HQHUDO
ؒ'RZQORDGDEOH5DWLQJ
ؒ,
ؒ
,QSX
,QSX
S W%O
%ORFNN
&UXHOW\
ؒ795DWLQJ*HQHUDO
/DQJXDJH
ؒ'RZQORDGDEOH5DWLQJ
ؒ,
ؒ
,QSX
,QSX
S W%O
%ORFNN 6DGQHVV
ᯙ
ᯐ
2Q
ᯙ
*HQUH
$JH
ᯝ
&ORVH
ᯫ
1
MENU
2
1
ENTER
Select LOCK.
2 ABC 3 DEF
4 GHI 5 JKL 6 MNO
7PQRS 8 TUV 9 WXYZ
Input the password.
0
3
PARENTAL CONTROL / RATING
170
4
5
Select Downloadable Rating.
ENTER
Select desired Downloadable Rating
option.
ENTER
Select desired option and block it.
6
BACK
EXIT
Return to the previous menu.
Return to TV viewing.
ᯫ
Based on rating table, your TV's
OSD (On Screen Display) may differ slightly from what is shown in
this manual.
If a Downloadable rating is locked,
enter the password to unlock it temporarily.
EXTERNAL INPUT BLOCKING
Enables you to block an input.
/2&.
ᯒ0RYHᯙ(QWHU
/2&.
ؒ /RFN
/ N6
/RFN
6\V
6\ WHP
WHP
WHP
2Q
2
2
2Q
2
ؒ /RFN
/ N6
/RFN
6\V
6\ WHP
WHP
WHP
ؒ%ORFN&KDQQHO
ؒ0RYLH5DWLQJ
ؒ795DWLQJ&KLOGUHQ
ؒ795DWLQJ*HQHUDO
ؒ'RZQORDGDEOH5DWLQJ
ؒ,QSXW%ORFN
ؒ .H\/RFN
2II
ᯐ
2Q
2
2
2Q
2
ؒ$9
ؒ%ORFN&KDQQHO
ؒ$9
ؒ0RYLH5DWLQJ
‫܁‬2II‫۽‬
2II
2II
ؒ795DWLQJ&KLOGUHQ
ؒ&RPSRQHQW
ؒ795DWLQJ*HQHUDO
ؒ&RPSRQHQW
ؒ'RZQORDGDEOH5DWLQJ
ؒ5*%3&
ؒ,QSXW%ORFN
ؒ .H\/RFN
2II ؒ+'0,
2II
ؒ+'0,
2II
ؒ+'0,
2II
ؒ+'0,
2II
ᯙ
ᯒ0RYHᯙ(QWHU
2II
2II
&ORVH
1
MENU
2
1
ENTER
Select LOCK.
2 ABC 3 DEF
4 GHI 5 JKL 6 MNO
7PQRS 8 TUV 9 WXYZ
Input the password.
0
3
4
Select Input Block.
ENTER
5
Select input source.
6
BACK
EXIT
Return to the previous menu.
Return to TV viewing.
PARENTAL CONTROL / RATING
Select On or Off.
171
PARENTAL CONTROL / RATINGS
KEY LOCK
This feature can be used to prevent unauthorized viewing by locking out the front panel controls, so
that it can only be used with the remote control.
This TV is programmed to remember which option it was last set to even if you turn the TV off.
/2&.
ᯒ0RYHᯙ(QWHU
/2&.
ᯒ0RYHᯙ(QWHU
ؒ /RFN
/ N6
/RFN6
6\V
\ WHP
WHP
WHP
2Q
2
2
2Q
ؒ /RFN
/ N6
/RFN6
6\V
\ WHP
WHP
WHP
ؒ%ORFN&KDQQHO
ؒ%ORFN&KDQQHO
ؒ0RYLH5DWLQJ
ؒ0RYLH5DWLQJ
ؒ795DWLQJ&KLOGUHQ
ؒ795DWLQJ&KLOGUHQ
ؒ795DWLQJ*HQHUDO
ؒ795DWLQJ*HQHUDO
ؒ'RZQORDGDEOH5DWLQJ
ؒ'RZQORDGDEOH5DWLQJ
ؒ,QSXW%ORFN
ؒ,QSXW%ORFN
ؒ .H\/RFN
2II
ؒ .H\/RFN
2Q
ᯰ
ᯙ
2Q
2
2
2Q
۳2II
ᯡ2Q
1
MENU
2
1
ENTER
Select LOCK.
ᯫ
2 ABC 3 DEF
4 GHI 5 JKL 6 MNO
7PQRS 8 TUV 9 WXYZ
Input the password.
0
3
4
PARENTAL CONTROL / RATING
172
Select Key Lock.
ENTER
5
BACK
EXIT
Select On or Off.
Return to the previous menu.
Return to TV viewing.
ᯫ
ᯰ
ᯙ
ᯰ
ᯙ
In Key Lock ‘On’, if the TV is turned
off, press the / I, INPUT, CH (ᯜᯝor
ᰜᰝ) button on the TV or POWER,
INPUT, CH (ᰜᰝ) or NUMBER buttons on the remote control.
With the Key Lock On, the display
‘ Key Lock’ appears on the screen
if any button on the front panel is
pressed while viewing the TV.
APPENDIX
TROUBLESHOOTING
Abnormal Operation
ᯫ
The remote control
doesn’t work
ᯫ
ᯫ
ᯫ
ᯫ
TV turns off suddenly
ᯫ
ᯫ
Check to see if there is any object between the product and the remote
control causing obstruction. Ensure you are pointing the remote control
directly at the TV.
Ensure that the batteries are installed with correct polarity (+ to +, - to -).
Ensure that the correct remote operating mode is set: TV, VCR etc.
*This feature is not available for all models.
Install new batteries.
Is the sleep timer set?
Check the power control settings. Power interrupted.
If there is no signal, the TV turns off automatically in 15 minutes.
Video Problems
ᯫ
ᯫ
No picture &No sound
ᯫ
ᯫ
ᯫ
Picture appears slowly
after switching on
ᯫ
This is normal, the image is muted during the product startup process.
Please contact your service center, if the picture has not appeared after
five minutes.
ᯫ
Adjust Color in menu option.
Keep a sufficient distance between the product and the VCR.
Try another channel. The problem may be with the broadcast.
Are the video cables installed properly?
Activate any function to restore the brightness of the picture.
ᯫ
No or poor color or
poor picture
ᯫ
ᯫ
ᯫ
ᯫ
Check for local interference such as an electrical appliance or power
tool.
ᯫ
Poor reception on
some channels
ᯫ
ᯫ
Station or cable product experiencing problems, tune to another station.
Station signal is weak, reorient antenna to receive weaker station.
Check for sources of possible interference.
Lines or streaks in pictures
ᯫ
Check antenna (Change the direction of the antenna).
ᯫ
If an HDMI cable doesn’t support High Speed HDMI, it can cause flickers
or no screen display. In this case use the latest cables that support High
Speed HDMI.
No picture when connecting HDMI
APPENDIX
Horizontal/vertical bars
or picture shaking
Check whether the product is turned on.
Try another channel. The problem may be with the broadcast.
Is the power cord inserted into wall power outlet?
Check your antenna direction and/or location.
Test the wall power outlet, plug another product’s power cord into the
outlet where the product’s power cord was plugged in.
173
APPENDIX
Audio Problems
No output from one
of the speakers
Unusual sound from
inside the product
No sound
when connecting
HDMI/USB
ᯫ
Adjust Balance in menu option.
ᯫ
A change in ambient humidity or temperature may result in an unusual
noise when the product is turned on or off and does not indicate a fault
with the product.
ᯫ
Check High Speed HDMI cable.
Check USB cable over version 2.0.
*This feature is not available for all models.
Use normal MP3 file.
ᯫ
ᯫ
PC Mode Problems
The signal is out of
range
Vertical bar or stripe
on
background &
Horizontal Noise &
Incorrect position
Screen color is unstable or single color
When connecting the
HDMI cable to the PC,
there is no audio.
APPENDIX
174
ᯫ
ᯫ
Adjust resolution, horizontal frequency, or vertical frequency on the PC.
Check the input source.
ᯫ
Activate the Auto configure feature or adjust size, phase, or H/V position.
(Option)
ᯫ
Check the signal cable.
Reinstall the PC video card.
ᯫ
ᯫ
Check the manual for the video card in the PC to see if it supports
HDMI audio and how to set it up properly.
Movie List Problems
The file does not
appear on the Movie
List.
Message is displayed
saying “This file is
invalid” or the audio is
working normally but
the video is not working normally.
Message is displayed
saying “Unsupported
Audio” or the video is
working normally but
the audio is not working normally.
ᯫ
Check whether the file extension is supported.
ᯫ
Check whether the file is playing normally on a PC. (Check whether the
file is damaged.)
Check whether the resolution is supported.
Check whether the video/audio codec is supported.
Check whether the frame rate is supported.
ᯫ
ᯫ
ᯫ
ᯫ
ᯫ
ᯫ
ᯫ
ᯫ
ᯫ
Subtitle is not working.
ᯫ
ᯫ
ᯫ
Check whether the
file is damaged.)
Check whether the
Check whether the
Check whether the
file is playing normally on a PC. (Check whether the
audio codec is supported.
bit rate is supported.
sample rate is supported.
Check whether the file is playing normally on a PC. (Check whether the
file is damaged.)
Check whether the video file and subtitle file name are the same.
Check whether the video file and subtitle file are located in the same
folder.
Check whether the subtitle file is supported.
Check whether the language is supported. (When you open the subtitle
file on a PC, you can check the language of the subtitle file.)
APPENDIX
175
APPENDIX
MAINTENANCE
Early malfunctions can be prevented. Careful and regular cleaning can extend the amount of time you
can enjoy your new TV.
Caution: Be sure to turn the power off and unplug the power cord before you begin any cleaning.
Cleaning the Screen
1
Here’s a great way to keep the dust off your screen for a while. Wet a soft cloth in a mixture of
lukewarm water and a little fabric softener or dish washing detergent. Wring the cloth until it’s
almost dry, and then use it to wipe the screen.
2
Make sure the excess water is off the screen, and then let it air-dry before you turn on your TV.
Cleaning the Cabinet
ᯫ
ᯫ
To remove dirt or dust, wipe the cabinet with a soft, dry, lint-free cloth.
Please be sure not to use a wet cloth.
Extended Absence
CAUTION
Ź If you expect to leave your TV dormant for a long time (such as a vacation), it’s a good idea to
unplug the power cord to protect against possible damage from lightning or power surges.
APPENDIX
176
PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
32LD550
(32LD550-UB)
42LD550
(42LD550-UB)
800.0 mm x 563.0 mm x 207.0 mm
(31.5 inch x 22.1 inch x 8.1 inch)
1024.0 mm x 695.0 mm x 261.0 mm
(40.3 inch x 27.3 inch x 10.2 inch)
800.0 mm x 503.0 mm x 74.7 mm
(31.5 inch x 19.8 inch x 2.9 inch)
1024.0 mm x 632.0 mm x 78.7 mm
(40.3 inch x 24.8 inch x 3.0 inch)
MODELS
Dimensions
(Width x
Height
x Depth)
With stand
Weight
With stand
10.2 kg (22.4 lbs)
15.4 kg (33.9 lbs)
Without stand
9.2 kg (20.2 lbs)
13.8 kg (30.4 lbs)
46LD550
(46LD550-UB)
52LD550
(52LD550-UB)
Without stand
MODELS
Dimensions
(Width x
Height
x Depth)
With stand
1115.0 mm x 752.0 mm x 270.0 mm
(43.8 inch x 29.6 inch x 10.6 inch)
1266.0 mm x 851.0 mm x 330.0 mm
(49.8 inch x 33.5 inch x 12.9 inch)
Without stand
1115.0 mm x 680.0 mm x 77.0 mm
(43.8 inch x 26.7 inch x 3.0 inch)
1266.0 mm x 775.0 mm x 96.4 mm
(49.8 inch x 30.5 inch x 3.7 inch)
Weight
With stand
18.6 kg (41.0 lbs)
26.9 kg (59.3 lbs)
Without stand
16.6 kg (36.5 lbs)
23.6 kg (52.0 lbs)
MODELS
Dimensions
(Width x
Height
x Depth)
With stand
1441.0 mm x 963.0 mm x 345.0 mm
(56.7 inch x 37.9 inch x 13.5 inch)
Without stand
1441.0 mm x 877.0 mm x 109.0 mm
(56.7 inch x 34.5 inch x 4.2 inch)
Weight
With stand
40.0 kg (88.1 lbs)
Without stand
35.7 kg (78.7 lbs)
AC 100-240 V ~ 50 / 60 Hz
Television System
NTSC-M, ATSC, 64 & 256 QAM
Program Coverage
VHF 2-13, UHF 14-69, CATV 1-135, DTV 2-69, CADTV 1-135
Environment
condition
Operating Temperature
75 Ω
0 °C to 40 °C (32 °F to 104 °F)
Operating Humidity
Less than 80 %
Storage Temperature
-20 °C to 60 °C (-4 °F to 140 °F)
Storage Humidity
APPENDIX
Power requirement
External Antenna Impedance
ᯫ
60LD550
(60LD550-UB)
Less than 85 %
The specifications shown above may be changed without prior notice for quality improvement.
177
APPENDIX
47LD650
(47LD650-UA)
55LD650
(55LD650-UA)
1137.0 mm x 758.0 x 270.0 mm
(44.7 inch x 29.8 inch x 10.6 inch)
1329.0 mm x 872.0 mm x 330.0 mm
(52.3 inch x 34.3 inch x 12.9 inch)
1137.0 mm x 685.0 mm x 76.8 mm
(44.7 inch x 26.9 inch x 3.0 inch)
1329.0 mm x 796.0 mm x 96.5 mm
(52.3 inch x 31.3 inch x 3.7 inch)
With stand
20.3 kg (44.7 lbs)
33.0 kg (72.7 lbs)
Without stand
18.3 kg (40.3 lbs)
28.8 kg (63.4 lbs)
MODELS
With stand
Dimensions
(Width x
Height
x Depth)
Without stand
Weight
Power requirement
AC 100-240 V ~ 50 / 60 Hz
Television System
NTSC-M, ATSC, 64 & 256 QAM
Program Coverage
VHF 2-13, UHF 14-69, CATV 1-135, DTV 2-69, CADTV 1-135
External Antenna Impedance
Environment
condition
Operating Temperature
APPENDIX
178
0 °C to 40 °C (32 °F to 104 °F)
Operating Humidity
Less than 80 %
Storage Temperature
-20 °C to 60 °C (-4 °F to 140 °F)
Storage Humidity
ᯫ
75 Ω
Less than 85 %
The specifications shown above may be changed without prior notice for quality improvement.
MODELS
60PK750
(60PK750-UA, 60PK750-UF)
Dimensions
(Width x
Height
x Depth)
With stand
1184.0 mm X 801.0 mm X 309.7 mm
(46.6 inch x 31.5 inch x 12.1 inch)
1402.8 mm X 935.3 mm X 383.9mm
(55.2 inch x 36.8 inch x 15.1 inch)
Without stand
1184.0 mm X 738.5 mm X 52.4 mm
(46.6 inch x 29.0 inch x 2.0 inch)
1402.8 mm X 866.8 mm X 52.4mm
(55.2 inch x 34.1 inch x 2.0 inch)
Weight
With stand
32.3 kg (71.2 lbs)
47.2 kg (104.0 lbs)
Without stand
29.9 kg (65.9 lbs)
42.7 kg (94.1 lbs)
Power requirement
AC 100-240 V ~ 50 / 60 Hz
Television System
NTSC-M, ATSC, 64 & 256 QAM
Program Coverage
VHF 2-13, UHF 14-69, CATV 1-135, DTV 2-69, CADTV 1-135
External Antenna Impedance
Environment
condition
Operating Temperature
75 Ω
0 °C to 40 °C (32 °F to 104 °F)
Operating Humidity
Less than 80 %
Storage Temperature
-20 °C to 60 °C (-4 °F to 140 °F)
Storage Humidity
ᯫ
50PK750
(50PK750-UA, 50PK750-UF)
Less than 85 %
The specifications shown above may be changed without prior notice for quality improvement.
APPENDIX
179
APPENDIX
32LE5400
(32LE5400-UC)
42LE5350 (42LE5350-UB)
42LE5400 (42LE5400-UC)
42LE5500 (42LE5500-UA)
42LX6500 (42LX6500-UB)
With stand
784.6 mm x 558.1 mm x 221.0 mm
(30.8 inch x 21.9 inch x 8.7 inch)
1016.0 mm x 692.0 mm x 270.0 mm
(40.0 inch x 27.2 inch x 10.6 inch)
Without stand
784.6 mm x 499.5 mm x 39.9 mm
(30.8 inch x 19.6 inch x 1.5 inch)
1016.0 mm x 630.0 mm x 29.3 mm
(40.0 inch x 24.8 inch x 1.1 inch)
With stand
12.6 kg (27.7 lbs)
19.5 kg (42.9 lbs)
Without stand
10.5 kg (23.1 lbs)
16.7 kg (36.8 lbs)
47LE5350 (47LE5350-UB)
47LE5400 (47LE5400-UC)
47LE5500 (47LE5500-UA)
47LX6500 (47LX6500-UB)
55LE5400 (55LE5400-UC)
55LE5500 (55LE5500-UA)
55LX6500 (55LX6500-UB)
With stand
1126.6 mm x 757.9 mm x 284.4 mm
(44.3 inch x 29.8 inch x 11.1 inch)
1306.0 mm x 867.0 mm x 328.0 mm
(51.4 inch x 34.1 inch x 12.9 inch)
Without stand
1126.6 mm x 692.0 mm x 29.3 mm
(44.3 inch x 27.2 inch x 1.1 inch)
1306.0 mm x 797.0 mm x 29.3 mm
(51.4 inch x 31.3 inch x 1.1 inch)
With stand
22.9 kg (50.4 lbs)
34.5 kg (76.0 lbs)
Without stand
19.6 kg (43.2 lbs)
28.8 kg (63.4 lbs)
MODELS
Dimensions
(Width x
Height
x Depth)
Weight
MODELS
Dimensions
(Width x
Height
x Depth)
Weight
Power requirement
Television System
NTSC-M, ATSC, 64 & 256 QAM
Program Coverage
VHF 2-13, UHF 14-69, CATV 1-135, DTV 2-69, CADTV 1-135
External Antenna Impedance
Environment
condition
Operating Temperature
APPENDIX
180
75 Ω
0 °C to 40 °C (32 °F to 104 °F)
Operating Humidity
Less than 80 %
Storage Temperature
-20 °C to 60 °C (-4 °F to 140 °F)
Storage Humidity
ᯫ
AC 120 V ~ 50 / 60 Hz
Less than 85 %
The specifications shown above may be changed without prior notice for quality improvement.
MODELS
42LE7500
(42LE7500-UC)
47LE7500
(47LE7500-UC)
Dimensions
(Width x
Height
x Depth)
With stand
1018.2 mm x 693.5 mm x 269.8 mm
(40.0 inch x 27.3 inch x 10.6 inch)
1128.6 mm x 758.9 mm x 284.4 mm
(44.4 inch x 29.8 inch x 11.1 inch)
Without stand
1018.2 mm x 630.7 mm x 29.3 mm
(40.0 inch x 24.8 inch x 1.1 inch)
1128.6 mm x 693.3 mm x 29.8 mm
(44.4 inch x 27.2 inch x 1.1 inch)
Weight
With stand
21.9 kg (48.2 lbs)
26.2 kg (57.7 lbs)
19.1 kg (42.1 lbs)
23.0 kg (50.7 lbs)
Without stand
55LE7500
(55LE7500-UC)
MODELS
Dimensions
(Width x
Height
x Depth)
With stand
Weight
With stand
39.1 kg (86.2 lbs)
Without stand
33.5 kg (73.8 lbs)
1306.0 mm x 869.0 mm x 328.0 mm
(51.4 inch x 34.2 inch x 12.9 inch)
Without stand
1306.0 mm x 797.4 mm x 31.2 mm
(51.4 inch x 31.3 inch x 1.2 inch)
MODELS
55LE8500
(55LE8500-UA)
Dimensions
(Width x
Height
x Depth)
With stand
1122.6 mm x 769.3 mm x 275.0 mm
(44.1 inch x 30.2 inch x 10.8 inch)
1292.6 mm x 875.4 mm x 311.9 mm
(50.8 inch x 34.4 inch x 12.2 inch)
Without stand
1122.6 mm x 707.3 mm x 34.5 mm
(44.1 inch x 27.8 inch x 1.3 inch)
1292.6 mm x 802.9 mm x 34.5 mm
(50.8 inch x 31.6 inch x 1.3 inch)
Weight
With stand
31.6 kg (69.6 lbs)
43.8 kg (96.5 lbs)
Without stand
26.9 kg (59.3 lbs)
35.8 kg (78.9 lbs)
Power requirement
AC 120 V ~ 50 / 60 Hz
Television System
NTSC-M, ATSC, 64 & 256 QAM
Program Coverage
VHF 2-13, UHF 14-69, CATV 1-135, DTV 2-69, CADTV 1-135
Environment
condition
Operating Temperature
75 Ω
0 °C to 40 °C (32 °F to 104 °F)
Operating Humidity
Less than 80 %
Storage Temperature
-20 °C to 60 °C (-4 °F to 140 °F)
Storage Humidity
APPENDIX
External Antenna Impedance
ᯫ
47LE8500
(47LE8500-UA)
Less than 85 %
The specifications shown above may be changed without prior notice for quality improvement.
181
APPENDIX
IR CODES
*This feature is not available for all models.
1. How to Connect
ᯫ
Connect your wired remote control to the Remote Control port on the TV.
2. Remote Control IR Codes
ᯫ
Output waveform
Single pulse, modulated with 37.917 KHz signal at 455 KHz
Tc
Carrier frequency
FCAR = 1/TC = fOSC/12
Duty ratio = T1/TC = 1/3
T1
ᯫ
Configuration of frame
1st frame
Lead code
Low custom code
High custom code
Data code
Data code
C0 C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C0 C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7
Repeat frame
Repeat code
ᯫ
Tf
Lead code
9 ms
4.5 ms
ᯫ
Repeat code
0.55 ms
9 ms
APPENDIX
ᯫ
2.25 ms
Bit description: Tf
Bit ”0”
Bit ”1”
0.56 ms
0.56 ms
2.24 ms
1.12 ms
ᯫ
Frame interval: Tf
The waveform is transmitted as long as a key is depressed.
Tf
Tf
Tf=108 ms @455 KHz
182
Code Function
Note
Code
(Hexa)
Function
Note
(Hexa)
00
CH ᰜ
Remote Control Button
B0
ᰦ
Remote Control Button
01
CH ᰝ
Remote Control Button
B1
ᰧ
Remote Control Button
02
VOL +
Remote Control Button
BA
ᰨ
Remote Control Button
03
VOL -
Remote Control Button
D6
TV
Discrete IR Code
06
!
Remote Control Button
07
Remote Control Button
08
C4
POWER ON
Remote Control Button
(Power On/Off)
09
MUTE/DELETE
Remote Control Button
0B
INPUT
Remote Control Button
0F
TV
Remote Control Button
10-19
Number 0-9
Remote Control Button
1A
FLASHBK
Remote Control Button
1E
FAV/MARK
Remote Control Button
28
BACK
Remote Control Button
30
AV MODE
Remote Control Button
40
ᰜ
Remote Control Button
41
ᰝ
Remote Control Button
43
MENU
Remote Control Button
44
ENTER
Remote Control Button
45
Q.MENU
Remote Control Button
4C
- (Dash)/LIST
Remote Control Button
5B
EXIT
Remote Control Button
58
WIDGETS
Remote Control Button
59
NETCAST
Remote Control Button
61
BLUE, L/R SELECT Remote Control Button
63
YELLOW
Remote Control Button
71
GREEN
Remote Control Button
72
RED
Remote Control Button
79
RATIO
Remote Control Button
7E
SIMPLINK
Remote Control Button
8E
ᰩ
Remote Control Button
8F
ᰪ
Remote Control Button
95
ENERGY SAVING Remote Control Button
AA
INFO
Discrete IR Code
(Only Power On)
C5
POWER OFF
Discrete IR Code
(Only Power Off)
5A
AV1
Discrete IR Code
D0
AV2
Discrete IR Code
BF
COMPONENT1
Discrete IR Code
(AV1 Input Selection)
(AV2 Input Selection)
(Component1 Input Selection)
D4
COMPONENT2
Discrete IR Code
(Component2 Input Selection)
D5
RGB-PC
Discrete IR Code
(RGB-PC Input Selection)
CE
HDMI1
Discrete IR Code
(HDMI1 Input Selection)
CC
HDMI2
Discrete IR Code
E9
HDMI3
Discrete IR Code
(HDMI2 Input Selection)
(HDMI3 Input Selection)
DA
HDMI4
Discrete IR Code
(HDMI4 Input Selection)
76
Ratio 4:3
Discrete IR Code
(Only 4:3 Mode)
77
Ratio 16:9
Discrete IR Code
(Only 16:9 Mode)
AF
Ratio Zoom
Discrete IR Code
APPENDIX
ᯫ
(TV Input Selection)
(Only Zoom Mode)
DC
3D
Remote Control Button
Remote Control Button
Use this feature depending on your models.
183
APPENDIX
EXTERNAL CONTROL THROUGH RS-232C
The RS-232C port allows you connect the RS-232C input jack to an external control device (such as
a computer or an A/V control system) to control the TV’s functions externally.
ᯫ Note: RS-232C on this unit is intended to be used with third party RS-232C control hardware and
software.
The instructions below are provided to help with programming software or to test functionality using
telenet software.
RS-232C Setup
i.e)
RS-232C IN
(SERVICE ONLY)
RGB IN (PC)
/DVI IN
LAN
3
AUDIO IN
ꔡ
1
WIRELESS
CONTROL
VIDEO L(MONO) AUDIO R
AUDIO OUT
2
Y
PB
PR
L
R
1
AUDIO
VIDEO
AV IN 1 COMPONENT IN
(RGB/DVI) OPTICAL DIGITAL
2
PC
Type of Connector; D-Sub 9-Pin Male
No.
APPENDIX
184
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Communication Parameters
Baud rate : 9600 bps (UART)
ᯫ Data length : 8 bits
ᯫ Parity : None
ᯫ Stop bit : 1 bit
ᯫ Communication code : ASCII code
ᯫ Use a crossed (reverse) cable.
ᯫ
Pin Name
No connection
RXD (Receive data)
TXD (Transmit data)
DTR (DTE side ready)
GND
DSR (DCE side ready)
RTS (Ready to send)
CTS (Clear to send)
! NOTE
ŹThis product has command echo back in
the RS-232C Command.
No Connection
1
5
6
9
RS-232C Configurations
7-Wire Configuration
(Serial female-female NULL modem cable)
PC
TV
RXD
TXD
GND
DTR
DSR
RTS
CTS
2
3
5
4
6
7
8
3
2
5
6
4
8
7
D-Sub 9
D-Sub 9
TXD
RXD
GND
DSR
DTR
CTS
RTS
3-Wire Configurations
(Not standard)
PC
TV
RXD
TXD
GND
DTR
DSR
RTS
CTS
2
3
5
4
6
7
8
3
2
5
6
4
7
8
D-Sub 9
D-Sub 9
TXD
RXD
GND
DTR
DSR
RTS
CTS
Set ID
Use this function to specify a TV ID number.
Refer to ‘Real Data Mapping’.
237,21
ᯒ0RYHᯙ(QWHU
ؒ /DQJXDJH
ؒ &DSWLRQ
237,21
ᯒ0RYHᯙ(QWHU
ؒ /DQJXDJH
2II
ؒ &DSWLRQ
ؒ 3RZHU,QGLFDWRU
2II
ؒ 3RZHU,QGLFDWRU
ؒ ,QLWLDO6HWWLQJ
ؒ ,QLWLDO6HWWLQJ
ؒ 6HW,'
ؒ 0RGH6HWWLQJ
+RPH8VH
ᯙ
ᯐ
ؒ 6HW,'
ؒ 0RGH6HWWLQJ
+RPH8VH
‫۽܁‬
&ORVH
1
2
ENTER
ENTER
4
BACK
EXIT
Select OPTION.
Real data mapping
0
Step 0
A
Step 10 (Set ID 10)
F
Step 15 (Set ID 15)
10
Step 16 (Set ID 16)
63
Step 99 (Set ID 99)
64
Step 100
Select Set ID.
Choose the desired TV ID number.
The adjustment range of Set ID is
1~ 99.
APPENDIX
3
ᯫ
MENU
Return to the previous menu.
Return to TV viewing.
185
APPENDIX
Command Reference List
Transmission / Receiving Protocol
COMMAND1
COMMAND2
DATA
(Hexadecimal)
01. Power
k
a
00 - 01
02. Input Select
x
b
Ź P.187
03. Aspect Ratio
k
c
Ź P.187
04. Screen Mute
k
d
00 - 01
05. Volume Mute
k
e
00 - 01
06. Volume
Control
k
f
00 - 64
07. Contrast
k
g
00 - 64
08. Brightness
k
h
00 - 64
Transmission
[Command1][Command2][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
[Command 1] : First command to control the set. (j,
k, m or x)
12. OSD Select
k
l
00 - 01
13. Remote
Control Lock
Mode
k
m
00 - 01
14. Treble
k
r
00 - 64
[Command 2] : Second command to control the
set.
[Set ID] : You can adjust the set ID to choose
desired TV ID number in Setup menu.
Adjustment range is 1-99. When selecting
Set ID ‘0’, every connected the TV is controlled. Set ID is indicated as decimal
(1-99) on menu and as Hexa decimal (0x0
- 0x63) on transmission /receiving protocol.
[DATA] : To transmit the command data.
Transmit the ‘FF’ data to read status of
command.
[Cr] : Carriage Return
ASCII code ‘0x0D’
[ ] : ASCII code ‘space (0x20)’
* In this model, TV will not send the status during the
standby mode.
15. Bass
k
s
00 - 64
OK Acknowledgement
16. Balance
k
t
00 - 64
17. Color
Temperature
x
u
00 - 64
18. ISM Method
j
p
Ź P.188
19. Energy Saving
j
q
Ź P.188
20. Auto
j
Configuration
u
Ź P.188
22. Channel Add/
Del
m
b
00 - 01
23. Key
m
c
Ź P.189
24. Backlight
P
g
00 - 64
09. Color
k
i
00 - 64
10. Tint
k
j
00 - 64
11. Sharpness
k
k
00 - 64
For LED LCD TV/LCD TV
For Plasma TV
[Command2][ ][Set ID][ ][OK][Data][x]
The TV transmits ACK (acknowledgement) based
on this format when receiving normal data. At this
time, if the data is data read mode, it indicates present status data. If the data is data write mode, it
returns the data of the PC computer.
* In this model, TV will not send the status during the
standby mode.
* Data Format
[Command 2] : Use as command.
[Set ID] : Use the small character, if set ID is 10, it will send
the ‘0’, ‘a’.
[DATA] : Use the small character, if data is 0 x ab, it will
send the ‘a’, ‘b’.
[OK] : Use the large character.
Error Acknowledgement
[Command2][ ][Set ID][ ][NG][Data][x]
APPENDIX
186
21.
Channel
Tuning
COMMAND1
COMMAND2
DATA00
(Hexadecimal)
DATA01
(Hexadecimal)
m
a
physical
program
high
major
program
low
DATA02
(Hexadecimal)
DATA03
(Hexadecimal)
DATA04
(Hexadecimal)
DATA05
(Hexadecimal)
major low
minor
high
minor low
attribute
The TV transmits ACK (acknowledgement) based
on this format when receiving abnormal data from
non-viable functions or communication errors.
Data1: Illegal Code
Data2: Not supported function
Data3: Wait more time
* In this model, TV will not send the status during the
standby mode.
* Data Format
[Command 2] : Use as command.
[Set ID] : Use the small character, if set ID is 10, it will send
the ‘0’, ‘a’.
[DATA] : Use the small character, if data is 0 x ab, it will
send the ‘a’, ‘b’.
[NG] : Use the large character
01. Power (Command: k a)
05. Volume Mute (Command: k e)
To control Power On/Off of the TV.
Transmission [k][a][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Data 00: Power Off
Data 01: Power On
Acknowledgement [a][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
* In a like manner, if other functions transmit ‘FF’ data
based on this format, Acknowledgement data feedback presents status about each function.
* Note: In this model, TV will send the Acknowledge
after power on processing completion.
There might be a time delay between command and
acknowledge.
02. Input Select (Command: x b)
To control volume mute on/off.
You can also adjust mute using the MUTE button on
remote control.
Transmission [k][e][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Data 00: Volume mute on (Volume off)
Data 01: Volume mute off (Volume on)
Acknowledgement [e][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
06. Volume Control (Command: k f)
To adjust volume.
You can also adjust volume with the volume buttons
on remote control.
To select input source for TV.
Transmission [k][f][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Transmission [x][b][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Data 00: DTV (Antenna) Data 01: DTV (Cable)
Data Min: 00 - Max: 64 (*transmit by Hexadecimal code)
*Refer to ‘Real data mapping’.
Data 10: Analog (Antenna) Data 11: Analog (Cable)
Acknowledgement [f][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
Data 20: AV1
Data 21: AV 2
Data 40: Component1
Data 41: Component 2
07. Contrast (Command: k g)
Data 42: Component 3 Data 60: RGB-PC
To adjust screen contrast.
You can also adjust contrast in the PICTURE menu.
Data 90: HDMI1
Data 91: HDMI2
Transmission [k][g][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Data 92: HDMI3
Data 93: HDMI4
Acknowledgement [b][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
Data Min: 00 - Max: 64 (*transmit by Hexadecimal code)
*Refer to ‘Real data mapping’.
* Use the feature depending on your model.
Acknowledgement [g][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
03. Aspect Ratio (Command: k c)
To adjust the screen format.
Transmission [k][c][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Data 01: 4:3
Data 09: Just scan
Data 02: 16:9
Data 10: Cinema Zoom1
Data 04: Zoom
Data 06: Set by program
08. Brightness (Command: k h)
To adjust screen brightness.
You can also adjust brightness in the PICTURE menu.
Transmission [k][h][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Data Min: 00 - Max: 64 (*transmit by Hexadecimal code)
*Refer to ‘Real data mapping’.
Acknowledgement [h][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
Data 1F: Cinema Zoom16
Acknowledgement [c][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
09. Color (Command: k i)
To adjust screen color.
You can also adjust color in the PICTURE menu.
04. Screen Mute (Command: k d)
To select screen mute on/off.
Transmission [k][i][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Data Min: 00 - Max: 64 (*transmit by Hexadecimal code)
*Refer to ‘Real data mapping’.
Data 00: Screen mute off (Picture on), Video-out Mute off
Acknowledgement [i][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
Data 01: Screen mute on (Picture off)
Data 10: Video-out Mute on
10. Tint (Command: k j)
Acknowledgement [d][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
To adjust screen tint.
You can also adjust tint in the PICTURE menu.
* In case of Video-out Mute on only, TV will display On
Screen Display (OSD). But, in case of screen mute
on, TV will not display On Screen Display (OSD).
Transmission [k][j][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
APPENDIX
Transmission [k][d][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Data Red: 00 - Green: 64 (*transmit by Hexadecimal code)
*Refer to ‘Real data mapping’.
Acknowledgement [ j ][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
187
APPENDIX
11. Sharpness (Command: k k)
To adjust screen sharpness.
You can also adjust sharpness in the Picture menu.
Transmission [k][k][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Data Min: 00 - Max: 64 (*transmit by Hexadecimal code)
*Refer to ‘Real data mapping’.
Acknowledgement [k][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
17. Color Temperature (Command: x u)
To adjust color temperature.
You can also adjust color temperature in the Picture
menu.
Transmission [x][u][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Data Warm: 00 - Cool: 64 (*transmit by Hexadecimal code)
*Refer to ‘Real data mapping’.
Acknowledgement [u][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
12. OSD Select (Command: k l)
To select OSD (On Screen Display) on/off.
Transmission [k][l][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Data 00: OSD off
Data 01: OSD on
Acknowledgement [l][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
13. Remote Control Lock Mode (Command: k m)
To lock the remote control and the front panel controls on the set.
Transmission [k][m][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Data 00: Lock off
Data 01: Lock on
Acknowledgement [m][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
If you’re not using the remote control and front panel
controls on the TV, use this mode. When main power
is on/off, remote control lock is released.
If Key Lock is on in the standby mode, TV will not turn
on by POWER button of remote control and on the TV.
18. ISM Method (Command: j p) (For Plasma TV)
To avoid having a fixed image remain on screen.
Transmission [ j ][p][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Data 02: Orbiter
Data 08: Normal
04: White Wash
20: Color Wash
Acknowledgement [p][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
19. Energy Saving (Command: j q)
To control the energy saving function.
Transmission [ j ][q][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Data 00: Off
Data 01: Minimum
Data 02: Medium
Data 03: Maximum
Data 04: Auto/Intelligent Sensor (depending on model)
Data 05: Screen off
Acknowledgement [q][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
20. Auto Configuration (Command: j u)
14. Treble (Command: k r)
To adjust treble.
You can also adjust treble in the Audio menu.
To adjust picture position and minimize image shaking automatically. Auto configuration only works in
RGB-PC mode.
Transmission [k][r][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Transmission [ j ][u][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Data Min: 00 - Max: 64 (*transmit by Hexadecimal code)
*Refer to ‘Real data mapping’.
Data 01: To set
Acknowledgement [r][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
15. Bass (Command: k s)
Acknowledgement [u][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
21. Channel Tuning (Command: m a)
To tune channel to following physical/major/minor number.
To adjust bass.
You can also adjust bass in the Audio menu.
Transmission [m][a][ ][Set ID][ ][Data00][ ][Data01]
[ ][Data02][ ][Data03][ ][Data04][ ][Data05][Cr]
Transmission [k][s][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Digital channels have a Physical, Major, and Minor
channel number. The Physical number is the actual
digital channel number, the Major is the number that
the channel should be mapped to, and the Minor is
the sub-channel. Since the ATSC tuner automatically
maps the channel to the Major number, the Physical
number is not required when sending a command.
Data Min: 00 - Max: 64 (*transmit by Hexadecimal code)
APPENDIX
*Refer to ‘Real data mapping’.
Acknowledgement [s][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
16. Balance (Command: k t)
To adjust balance.
You can also adjust balance in the Audio menu.
Transmission [k][t][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Data Min: 00 - Max: 64 (*transmit by Hexadecimal code)
*Refer to ‘Real data mapping’.
Acknowledgement [t][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
Data 00: Physical Channel Number
NTSC air: 02 - 45, NTSC cable: 01, 0E - 7D
ATSC air: 01 - 45, ATSC cable: 01 - 87
Data 01 & 02: Major Channel Number
Data 01: High byte
Data 02: Low byte
Two bytes are available for the Major and Minor,
normally only the second byte is used.
Data 03 & 04: Minor Channel Number
Not needed for NTSC.
188
Data5: 7
6
5
Main/Sub
Picture
Two/One Part
Channel
Using Physical
Channel
4
Reserved
3
2
1
0
0 Main
0 Two
1 Sub
1 One
0 Use
x
0
0
0
0
NTSC Air
1 No Use
x
0
0
0
1
NTSC Cable
x
0
0
1
0
ATSC Air
x
0
0
1
1
ATSC Cable_std
x
0
1
0
0
ATSC Cable_hrc
Step
x
0
1
0
1
ATSC Cable_irc
x
0
1
1
0
ATSC cable_auto
x
0
1
1
1
Reserved
x
x
x
x
x
...
x
1
1
1
1
Reserved
The table above lists the binary code which must be
converted to Hexadecimal before sending. For example: The binary code to tune the sub source to an
NTSC cable channel is “1000 0001”, which translates
to “81” in Hex.
* 7th bit : For which source do you want to change the
channel.
* 6th bit: Use a two part or one part channel. Most
cases just use 0 since it’s ignored when using
NTSC.
* 5th bit: Use 0 with NTSC since it can only use the
physical channel number. Normally use 1 for ATSC
since most times it doesn’t matter what the physical
number is.
22. Channel Add/Del (Command: m b)
To add and delete the channels.
Transmission [m][b][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Data 00: Channel Delete Data 01: Channel Add
Acknowledgement [b][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
23. Key (Command: m c)
To send IR remote control code.
Transmission [m][c][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
See page 183.
Acknowledgement [c][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
* 4th bit: Set to 0.
* 3-0 bits: Choose signal type.
24. Backlight (Command: m g) (For LED LCD TV/LCD TV)
To adjust screen backlight.
*Tune Command Examples:
1. Tune to the analog (NTSC) cable channel 35.
Transmission [m][g][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Data Min:00 ~ Max:64 (*transmit by Hexadecimal code)
Data 00 = Physical of 35 = 23
*Refer to ‘Real data mapping’.
Data 01 & 02 = No Major = 00 00
Acknowledgement [g][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
Data 03 & 04 = No Minor = 00 00
Data 05 = 0000 0001 in binary = 01
Data 00 = Don’t know Physical = 00
Data 01 & 02 = Major is 30 = 00 1E
APPENDIX
Total = ma 00 23 00 00 00 00 01
2. Tune to the digital local channel 30-3.
Data 03 & 04 = Minor is 3 = 00 03
Data 05 = 0010 0010 in binary = 22
Total = ma 00 00 00 1E 00 03 22
Acknowledgement[a][ ][Set ID][ ][OK][Data00]
[Data01] [Data02][Data03][Data04][x][a][ ][Set ID][ ]
[NG][Data00][x]
189
APPENDIX
OPEN SOURCE LICENSE
GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
Version 2, June 1991
Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc., 51
Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
Preamble
The licenses for most software are designed to take away
your freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU
General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software - to make sure the
software is free for all its users. This General Public License
applies to most of the Free Software Foundation's software
and to any other program whose authors commit to using
it. (Some other free software foundation software is covered by the GNU Lesser General Public License instead.)
You can apply it to your programs, too.
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed
to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this service if you wish),
that you receive source code or can get it if you want it, that
you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free
programs; and that you know you can do these things.
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that
forbid anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights. These restrictions translate to certain
responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it.
For example, if you distribute copies of such a program,
whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all
the rights that you have. You must make sure that they, too,
receive or can get the source code. And you must show
them these terms so they know their rights.
APPENDIX
We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the
software, and (2) offer you this license which gives you legal
permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the software.
Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to
make certain that everyone understands that there is no
warranty for this free software. If the software is modified
by someone else and passed on, we want its recipients to
know that what they have is not the original, so that any
problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original authors' reputations.
Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software patents. We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the program proprietary. To prevent
this, we have made it clear that any patent must be
190
licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all.
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution
and modification follow.
GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION
AND MODIFICATION
0. This license applies to any program or other work which
contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying
it may be distributed under the terms of this General
Public License. The "Program", below, refers to any such
program or work, and a "work based on the Program"
means either the Program or any derivative work under
copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the
Program or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated into another language.
(Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in
the term "modification".) Each licensee is addressed as
"you".
Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this license; they are outside its
scope. The act of running the Program is not restricted,
and the output from the program is covered only if its
contents constitute a work based on the program (independent of having been made by running the program).
Whether that is true depends on what the program
does.
1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the
program's source code as you receive it, in any medium,
provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and
disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that
refer to this license and to the absence of any warranty;
and give any other recipients of the program a copy of
this license along with the Program.
You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring
a copy, and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee.
2. You may modify your copy or copies of the program or
any portion of it, thus forming a work based on the
Program, and copy and distribute such modifications or
work under the terms of section 1 above, provided that
you also meet all of these conditions:
a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent
notices stating that you changed the files and the
date of any change.
b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in whole or in part contains or is derived
from the Program or any part there of, to be licensed
as a whole at no charge to all third parties under the
terms of this license.
c) If the modified program normally reads commands
interactively when run, you must cause it, when started running for such interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a notice that
there is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide
a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under these conditions, and telling the user
how to view a copy of this license. (Exception: if the
Program itself is interactive but does not normally
print such an announcement, your work based on the
Program is not required to print an announcement.)
These requirements apply to the modified work as a
whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not
derived from the Program, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves,
then this license, and its terms, do not apply to those
sections when you distribute them as separate works.
But when you distribute the same sections as part of a
whole which is a work based on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this license,
whose permissions for other licensees extend to the
entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless
of who wrote it.
Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or
contest your rights to work written entirely by you; rather,
the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the program.
In addition, mere aggregation of another work not
based on the program with the Program (or with a work
based on the program) on a volume of a storage or
distribution medium does not bring the other work
under the scope of this license.
The source code for a work means the preferred form of
the work for making modifications to it. For an executable work, complete source code means all the source
code for all modules it contains, plus any associated
interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control
compilation and installation of the executable. However,
as a special exception, the source code distributed need
not include anything that is normally distributed (in
either source or binary form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating
system on which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies the executable.
If distribution of executable or object code is made by
offering access to copy from a designated place, then
offering equivalent access to copy the source code from
the same place counts as distribution of the source
code, even though third parties are not compelled to
copy the source along with the object code.
4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the
Program except as expressly provided under this license.
Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or
distribute the Program is void, and will automatically
terminate your rights under this license. However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under
this license will not have their licenses terminated so
long as such parties remain in full compliance.
5. You are not required to accept this license, since you
have not signed it. However, nothing else grants you
permission to modify or distribute the Program or its
derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law if
you do not accept this license. Therefore, by modifying
or distributing the program (or any work based on the
program), you indicate your acceptance of this license
to do so, and all its terms and conditions for copying,
distributing or modifying the program or works based
on it.
6. Each time you redistribute the program (or any work
based on the Program), the recipient automatically
receives a license from the original licensor to copy,
distribute or modify the Program subject to these terms
and conditions. You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted
herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance
by third parties to this license.
APPENDIX
3. You may copy and distribute the program (or a work
based on it, under section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of sections 1 and 2 above
provided that you also do one of the following:
a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding
machine-readable source code, which must be distributed under the terms of sections 1 and 2 above
on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or,
b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least
three years, to give any third party, for a charge no
more than your cost of physically performing source
distribution, a complete machine-readable copy of
the corresponding source code, to be distributed
under the terms of sections 1 and 2 above on a
medium customarily used for software interchange;
or,
c) Accompany it with the information you received as to
the offer to distribute corresponding source code.
(This alternative is allowed only for noncommercial
distribution and only if you received the program in
object code or executable form with such an offer, in
accord with Subsection b above.)
191
APPENDIX
7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation
of patent infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you
(whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that
contradict the conditions of this license, they do not
excuse you from the conditions of this license. If you
cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your
obligations under this license and any other pertinent
obligations, then as a consequence you may not distribute the program at all. For example, if a patent license
would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the program by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy
both it and this license would be to refrain entirely from
distribution of the program.
If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the balance of
the section is intended to apply and the section as a
whole is intended to apply in other circumstances.
It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to
infringe any patents or other property right claims or to
contest validity of any such claims; this section has the
sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system, which is implemented by public license practices. Many people have made generous
contributions to the wide range of software distributed
through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to
decide if he or she is willing to distribute software
through any other system and a licensee cannot impose
that choice.
This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what
is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this
license.
APPENDIX
8. If the distribution and/or use of the program is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder who
places the program under this license may add an
explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding
those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in
or among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this
license incorporates the limitation as if written in the
body of this license.
9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/
or new versions of the General Public License from time
to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the
present version, but may differ in detail to address new
problems or concerns.
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If
192
the program specifies a version number of this license
which applies to it and "any later version", you have the
option of following the terms and conditions either of
that version or of any later version published by the Free
Software Foundation. If the program does not specify a
version number of this license, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation.
10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the program into
other free programs whose distribution conditions are
different, write to the author to ask for permission. For
software which is copyrighted by the Free Software
Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we
sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will
be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status
of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting
the sharing and reuse of software generally.
NO WARRANTY
11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF
CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE
PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY
APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE
STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS
AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM
"AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER
EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY
AND
FITNESS
FOR
A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO
THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE
PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM
PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL
NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE
LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY
COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO
MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM
AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR
DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL,
INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE
THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED
INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR
THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO
OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF
SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
How to apply these terms to your new programs
If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the
greatest possible use to the public, the best way to achieve
this is to make it free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms.
To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is
safest to attach them to the start of each source file to
most effectively convey the exclusion of warranty; and each
file should have at least the "copyright" line and a pointer
to where the full notice is found.
one line to give the program's name and a brief idea of
what it does.
Copyright (C) <year> <name of author>
This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/
or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public
License as published by the Free Software Foundation;
either version 2 of the license, or (at your option) any later
version.
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied
warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public
License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU General
Public License along with this program; if not, write to the
Free Software Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth
Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA.
Also add information on how to contact you by electronic
and paper mail.
If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice
like this when it starts in an interactive mode:
Gnomovision version 69, Copyright (C) year name of author
Gnomovision comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY;
for details type ‘show w’. This is free software, and you are
welcome to redistribute it under certain conditions; type
‘show c’ for details.
The hypothetical commands ‘show w’ and ‘show c’ should
show the appropriate parts of the General Public License.
Of course, the commands you use may be called something other than ‘show w’ and ‘show c’; they could even be
mouse-clicks or menu items-whatever suits your program.
You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your school, if any, to sign a “copyright disclaimer” for the program, if necessary. Here is a sample;
alter the names:
Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the
program ‘Gnomovision’ (which makes passes at compilers)
written by James Hacker.
signature of Ty Coon, 1 April 1989
Ty Coon, President of Vice
This General Public License does not permit incorporating
your program into proprietary programs. If your program is
a subroutine library, you may consider it more useful to
permit linking proprietary applications with the library. If
this is what you want to do, use the GNU Lesser General
Public License instead of this license.
APPENDIX
193
APPENDIX
GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
Version 2.1, February 1999
Copyright (C) 1991, 1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc. 51
Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not
allowed.
[This is the first released version of the Lesser GPL. It also
counts as the successor of the GNU Library Public
License, version 2, hence the version number 2.1.]
Preamble
The licenses for most software are designed to take away
your freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU
General Public Licenses are intended to guarantee your
freedom to share and change free software - to make sure
the software is free for all its users.
This license, the Lesser General Public License, applies to
some specially designated software packages - typically
libraries - of the Free Software Foundation and other
authors who decide to use it. You can use it too, but we
suggest you first think carefully about whether this license
or the ordinary General Public License is the better strategy to use in any particular case, based on the explanations below.
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom of use, not price. Our General Public Licenses are
designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this service
if you wish); that you receive source code or can get it if you
want it; that you can change the software and use pieces
of it in new free programs; and that you are informed that
you can do these things.
APPENDIX
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that
forbid distributors to deny you these rights or to ask you to
surrender these rights. These restrictions translate to certain
responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the library
or if you modify it.
For example, if you distribute copies of the library, whether
gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights
that we gave you. You must make sure that they, too,
receive or can get the source code. If you link other code
with the library, you must provide complete object files to
the recipients, so that they can relink them with the library
after making changes to the library and recompiling it. And
you must show them these terms so they know their rights.
We protect your rights with a two-step method: (1) we copyright the library, and (2) we offer you this license, which
gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the library.
194
To protect each distributor, we want to make it very clear
that there is no warranty for the free library. Also, if the
library is modified by someone else and passed on, the
recipients should know that what they have is not the
original version, so that the original author's reputation will
not be affected by problems that might be introduced by
others.
Finally, software patents pose a constant threat to the existence of any free program. We wish to make sure that a
company cannot effectively restrict the users of a free program by obtaining a restrictive license from a patent
holder. Therefore, we insist that any patent license obtained
for a version of the library must be consistent with the full
freedom of use specified in this license.
Most GNU software, including some libraries, is covered by
the ordinary GNU General Public License. This license, the
GNU Lesser General Public License, applies to certain designated libraries, and is quite different from the ordinary
General Public License. We use this license for certain
libraries in order to permit linking those libraries into nonfree programs.
When a program is linked with a library, whether statically
or using a shared library, the combination of the two is
legally speaking a combined work, a derivative of the original library. The ordinary General Public License therefore
permits such linking only if the entire combination fits its
criteria of freedom. The Lesser General Public License
permits more lax criteria for linking other code with the
library.
We call this license the "Lesser" General Public License
because it does Less to protect the user's freedom than
the ordinary General Public License. It also provides other
free software developers Less of an advantage over competing non-free programs. These disadvantages are the
reason we use the ordinary General Public License for
many libraries. However, the Lesser license provides advantages in certain special circumstances.
For example, on rare occasions, there may be a special
need to encourage the widest possible use of a certain
library, so that it becomes a de-facto standard. To achieve
this, non-free programs must be allowed to use the library.
A more frequent case is that a free library does the same
job as widely used non-free libraries. In this case, there is
little to gain by limiting the free library to free software only,
so we use the Lesser General Public License.
In other cases, permission to use a particular library in nonfree programs enables a greater number of people to use
a large body of free software. For example, permission to
use the GNU C Library in non-free programs enables many
more people to use the whole GNU operating system, as
well as its variant, the GNU/Linux operating system.
Although the Lesser General Public License is Less protective of the users' freedom, it does ensure that the user of a
program that is linked with the Library has the freedom and
the wherewithal to run that program using a modified version of the Library.
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution
and modification follow. Pay close attention to the difference between a "work based on the library" and a "work
that uses the library". The former contains code derived
from the library, whereas the latter must be combined with
the library in order to run.
GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION
AND MODIFICATION
0. This license agreement applies to any software library or
other program which contains a notice placed by the
copyright holder or other authorized party saying it may
be distributed under the terms of this Lesser General
Public License (also called “this license”). Each license
is addressed as "you".
A “library” means a collection of software functions
and/or data prepared so as to be conveniently linked
with application programs (which use some of those
functions and data) to form executables.
The “Library”, below, refers to any such software library or
work which has been distributed under these terms. A
“work based on the Library” means either the Library or
any derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a
work containing the library or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated straightforwardly into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is
included without limitation in the term “modification”.)
“Source code” for a work means the preferred form of
the work for making modifications to it. For a library,
complete source code means all the source code for all
modules it contains, plus any associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation
and installation of the library.
1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the
library's complete source code as you receive it, in any
medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright
notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the
You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring
a copy, and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee.
2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Library or
any portion of it, thus forming a work based on the
Library, and copy and distribute such modifications or
work under the terms of section 1 above, provided that
you also meet all of these conditions:
a) The modified work must itself be a software library.
b) You must cause the files modified to carry prominent
notices stating that you changed the files and the
date of any change.
c) You must cause the whole of the work to be licensed
at no charge to all third parties under the terms of
this license.
d) If a facility in the modified Library refers to a function
or a table of data to be supplied by an application
program that uses the facility, other than as an argument passed when the facility is invoked, then you
must make a good faith effort to ensure that, in the
event an application does not supply such function or
table, the facility still operates, and performs whatever part of its purpose remains meaningful.
(For example, a function in a library to compute square
roots has a purpose that is entirely well-defined independent of the application. Therefore, Subsection 2d
requires that any application-supplied function or table
used by this function must be optional: if the application
does not supply it, the square root function must still
compute square roots.)
These requirements apply to the modified work as a
whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not
derived from the library, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves,
then this license, and its terms, do not apply to those
sections when you distribute them as separate works.
But when you distribute the same sections as part of a
whole which is a work based on the library, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this license,
whose permissions for other licenses extend to the
entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless
of who wrote it.
Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or
contest your rights to work written entirely by you; rather,
the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the library.
APPENDIX
Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this license; they are outside its
scope. The act of running a program using the Library
is not restricted, and output from such a program is
covered only if its contents constitute a work based on
the library (independent of the use of the Library in a
tool for writing it). Whether that is true depends on what
the library does and what the program that uses the
library does.
notices that refer to this license and to the absence of
any warranty; and distribute a copy of this license along
with the Library.
In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based
on the library with the library (or with a work based on
the library) on a volume of a storage or distribution
medium does not bring the other work under the scope
of this license.
195
APPENDIX
3. You may opt to apply the terms of the ordinary GNU
General Public License instead of this License to a given
copy of the Library. To do this, you must alter all the
notices that refer to this License, so that they refer to the
ordinary GNU General Public License, version 2, instead
of to this License. (If a newer version than version 2 of
the ordinary GNU General Public License has appeared,
then you can specify that version instead if you wish.) Do
not make any other change in these notices.
Once this change is made in a given copy, it is irreversible for that copy, so the ordinary GNU General Public
License applies to all subsequent copies and derivative
works made from that copy.
This option is useful when you wish to copy part of the
code of the library into a program that is not a library.
4. You may copy and distribute the library (or a portion or
derivative of it, under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above
provided that you accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which must
be distributed under the terms of sections 1 and 2
above on a medium customarily used for software interchange.
If distribution of object code is made by offering access
to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same
place satisfies the requirement to distribute the source
code, even though third parties are not compelled to
copy the source along with the object code.
5. A program that contains no derivative of any portion of
the Library, but is designed to work with the Library by
being compiled or linked with it, is called a “work that
uses the Library”. Such a work, in isolation, is not a
derivative work of the Library, and therefore falls outside
the scope of this license.
However, linking a “work that uses the library” with the
Library creates an executable that is a derivative of the
Library (because it contains portions of the library),
rather than a “work that uses the library”. The executable
is therefore covered by this license. Section 6 states
terms for distribution of such executable.
APPENDIX
When a “work that uses the library” uses material from
a header file that is part of the library, the object code
for the work may be a derivative work of the library even
though the source code is not.
Whether this is true is especially significant if the work
can be linked without the library, or if the work is itself a
library. The threshold for this to be true is not precisely
defined by law.
If such an object file uses only numerical parameters,
data structure layouts and accessories, and small macros and small inline functions (ten lines or less in
length), then the use of the object file is unrestricted,
regardless of whether it is legally a derivative work.
(Executable containing this object code plus portions of
196
the library will still fall under Section 6.)
Otherwise, if the work is a derivative of the library, you
may distribute the object code for the work under the
terms of Section 6. Any executable containing that work
also fall under Section 6, whether or not they are linked
directly with the library itself.
6. As an exception to the sections above, you may also
combine or link a "work that uses the library" with the
library to produce a work containing portions of the
library, and distribute that work under terms of your
choice, provided that the terms permit modification of
the work for the customer's own use and reverse engineering for debugging such modifications.
You must give prominent notice with each copy of the
work that the library is used in it and that the Library and
its use are covered by this license. You must supply a
copy of this license. If the work during execution displays copyright notices, you must include the copyright
notice for the library among them, as well as a reference
directing the user to the copy of this license. Also, you
must do one of these things:
a) Accompany the work with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code for the library
including whatever changes were used in the work
(which must be distributed under Sections 1 and 2
above); and, if the work is an executable linked with
the Library, with the complete machine-readable
“work that uses the Library”, as object code and/or
source code, so that the user can modify the library
and then relink to produce a modified executable
containing the modified library. (It is understood that
the user who changes the contents of definitions files
in the library will not necessarily be able to recompile
the application to use the modified definitions.)
b) Use a suitable shared library mechanism for linking
with the library. A suitable mechanism is one that (1)
uses at run time a copy of the library already present
on the user’s computer system, rather than copying
library functions into the executable, and (2) will operate properly with a modified version of the library, if the
user installs one, as long as the modified version is
interface-compatible with the version that the work
was made with.
c) Accompany the work with a written offer, valid for at
least three years, to give the same user the materials
specified in Subsection 6, above, for a charge no
more than the cost of performing this distribution.
d) If distribution of the work is made by offering access
to copy from a designated place, offer equivalent
access to copy the above specified materials from
the same place.
e) Verify that the user has already received a copy of
these materials or that you have already sent this user
a copy.
For an executable, the required form of the "work that
uses the library" must include any data and utility programs needed for reproducing the executable from it.
However, as a special exception, the materials to be
distributed need not include anything that is normally
distributed (in either source or binary form) with the
major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the
operating system on which the executable runs, unless
that component itself accompanies the executable.
It may happen that this requirement contradicts the
license restrictions of other proprietary libraries that do
not normally accompany the operating system. Such a
contradiction means you cannot use both them and the
library together in an executable that you distribute.
7. You may place library facilities that are a work based on
the library side-by-side in a single library together with
other library facilities not covered by this license, and
distribute such a combined library, provided that the
separate distribution of the work based on the Library
and of the other library facilities is otherwise permitted,
and provided that you do these two things:
a) Accompany the combined library with a copy of the
same work based on the Library, uncombined with
any other library facilities. This must be distributed
under the terms of the sections above.
b) Give prominent notice with the combined library of
the fact that part of it is a work based on the library,
and explaining where to find the accompanying
uncombined form of the same work.
8. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute the library except as expressly provided under
this license. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify,
sublicense, link with, or distribute the library is void, and
will automatically terminate your rights under this
license. However, parties who have received copies, or
rights, from you under this license will not have their
licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in
full compliance.
10. Each time you redistribute the library (or any work based
on the Library), the recipient automatically receives a
license from the original licensor to copy, distribute, link
with or modify the library subject to these terms and
conditions. You may not impose any further restrictions
on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein.
11. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation
of patent infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you
(whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that
contradict the conditions of this license, they do not
excuse you from the conditions of this license. If you
cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your
obligations under this license and any other pertinent
obligations, then as a consequence you may not distribute the library at all. For example, if a patent license
would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the library
by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly
through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it
and this license would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the library.
If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the balance of
the section is intended to apply, and the section as a
whole is intended to apply in other circumstances.
It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to
infringe any patents or other property right claims or to
contest validity of any such claims; this section has the
sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system which is implemented by public license practices. Many people have made generous
contributions to the wide range of software distributed
through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to
decide if he or she is willing to distribute software
through any other system and a license cannot impose
that choice.
This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what
is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this
license.
12. If the distribution and/or use of the library is restricted in
certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted
interfaces, the original copyright holder who places the
library under this license may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries, so
that distribution is permitted only in or among countries
not thus excluded. In such case, this license incorporates
the limitation as if written in the body of this license.
13. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/
or new versions of the Lesser General Public License
from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in
spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to
address new problems or concerns.
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If
the library specifies a version number of this license
which applies to it and “any later version”, you have the
option of following the terms and conditions either of
that version or of any later version published by the Free
Software Foundation.
APPENDIX
9. You are not required to accept this license, since you
have not signed it. However, nothing else grants you
permission to modify or distribute the library or its
derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law if
you do not accept this license. Therefore, by modifying
or distributing the library (or any work based on the
library), you indicate your acceptance of this license to do
so, and all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the library or works based on it.
You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by
third parties with this license.
197
APPENDIX
If the library does not specify a license version number,
you may choose any version ever published by the Free
Software Foundation.
14. If you wish to incorporate parts of the library into other
free programs whose distribution conditions are incompatible with these, write to the author to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free
Software Foundation, write to the Free Software
Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this.
Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software
and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software
generally.
NO WARRANTY
15. BECAUSE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSED FREE OF
CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE
LIBRARY, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE
LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING
THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES
PROVIDE THE LIBRARY "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY
OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK
AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE
LIBRARY IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE LIBRARY
PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL
NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
APPENDIX
16. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE
LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY
COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO
MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE LIBRARY
AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR
DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL,
INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE
THE LIBRARY (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED
INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR
THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE LIBRARY TO
OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER SOFTWARE), EVEN IF
SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
How to apply these terms to your new libraries
If you develop a new library, and you want it to be of the
greatest possible use to the public, we recommend making
198
it free software that everyone can redistribute and change.
You can do so by permitting redistribution under these
terms (or, alternatively, under the terms of the ordinary
General Public License).
To apply these terms, attach the following notices to the
library. It is safest to attach them to the start of each
source file to most effectively convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the “copyright” line
and a pointer to where the full notice is found.
one line to give the library's name and a brief idea of what
it does.
Copyright (C) <year> <name of author>
This library is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General
Public License as published by the Free Software
Foundation; either version 2.1 of the license, or (at your
option) any later version.
This library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied
warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU Lesser General
Public License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser
General Public License along with this library; if not, write to
the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth
Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
Also add information on how to contact you by electronic
and paper mail.
You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your school, if any, to sign a “copyright disclaimer” for the library, if necessary. Here is a sample; alter
the names:
Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the
library ‘Frob’ (a library for tweaking knobs) written by James
Random Hacker.
signature of Ty Coon, 1 April 1990
Ty Coon, President of Vice
MOZILLA PUBLIC LICENSE
Version 1.1
--------------1.Definitions.
1.0.1. “Commercial use” means distribution or otherwise
making the covered code available to a third party.
1.1.
“Contributor” means each entity that creates or contributes to the creation of modifications.
1.2.
“Contributor version” means the combination of the
original code, prior modifications used by a contributor, and the modifications made by that particular
contributor.
1.3.
“Covered code” means the original code or modifications or the combination of the original code and
modifications, in each case including portions thereof.
1.4.
“Electronic distribution mechanism” means a mechanism generally accepted in the software development community for the electronic transfer of data.
which, at the time of its release under this license is
not already covered code governed by this license.
1.10.1. “Patent claims” means any patent claim(s), now
owned or hereafter acquired, including without limitation, method, process, and apparatus claims, in any
patent licensable by grantor.
1.11.
“Source code” means the preferred form of the covered code for making modifications to it, including all
modules it contains, plus any associated interface
definition files, scripts used to control compilation
and installation of an executable, or source code differential comparisons against either the original code
or another well known, available covered code of the
contributor's choice. The source code can be in a
compressed or archival form, provided the appropriate decompression or de-archiving software is widely available for no charge.
1.5.
“Executable” means covered code in any form other
than source code.
1.6.
“Initial developer” means the individual or entity
identified as the initial Developer in the Source Code
notice required by exhibit A.
1.7.
“Larger work” means a work which combines covered
code or portions thereof with code not governed by
the terms of this License.
1.12. “You” (or “Your”) means an individual or a legal
entity exercising rights under, and complying with all
of the terms of, this license or a future version of this
license issued under section 6.1.
For legal entities, “You” includes any entity which
controls, is controlled by, or is under common control
with You. For purposes of this definition, “control”
means (a) the power, direct or indirect, to cause the
direction or management of such entity, whether by
contract or otherwise, or (b) ownership of more than
fifty percent (50%) of the outstanding shares or beneficial ownership of such entity.
1.8.
“License” means this document.
2. Source Code License.
1.8.1. “Licensable” means having the right to grant, to the
maximum extent possible, whether at the time of the
initial grant or subsequently acquired, any and all of
the rights conveyed herein.
“Modifications” means any addition to or deletion
from the substance or structure of either the original
code or any previous modifications. When covered
code is released as a series of files, a modification is:
A. Any addition to or deletion from the contents of a
file containing original code or previous modifications.
B. Any new file that contains any part of the original
code or previous modifications.
The initial developer grant.
The initial developer hereby grants You a world-wide,
royalty-free, non-exclusive license, subject to third
party intellectual property claims:
a) under intellectual property rights (other than patent or trademark) licensable by initial developer to
use, reproduce, modify, display, perform, sublicense and distribute the original code (or portions
thereof) with or without modifications, and/or as
part of a larger work; and
(b) under patents claims infringed by the making,
using or selling of original code, to make, have
made, use, practice, sell, and offer for sale, and/
or otherwise dispose of the original code (or portions there of).
APPENDIX
1.9.
2.1.
1.10. “Original code” means source code of computer
software code which is described in the source code
notice required by exhibit as original code, and
199
APPENDIX
(c) the licenses granted in this section 2.1(a) and (b)
are effective on the date Initial developer first
distributes original code under the terms of this
license.
(d) Notwithstanding section 2.1(b) above, no patent
license is granted: 1) for code that You delete
from the original Code; 2) separate from the
original code; or 3) for infringements caused by:
i) the modification of the original code or ii) the
combination of the original code with other software or devices.
2.2. Contributor Grant.
Subject to third party intellectual property claims,
each contributor hereby grants You a world-wide,
royalty-free, non-exclusive license
APPENDIX
200
(a) under intellectual property rights (other than patent or trademark) licensable by contributor, to
use, reproduce, modify, display, perform, sublicense and distribute the modifications created by
such contributor (or portions thereof) either on
an unmodified basis, with other modifications, as
covered code and/or as part of a larger work; and
(b) under patent claims infringed by the making,
using, or selling of modifications made by that
contributor either alone and/or in combination
with its contributor version (or portions of such
combination), to make, use, sell, offer for sale,
have made, and/or otherwise dispose of: 1) modifications made by that contributor (or portions
thereof); and 2) the combination of modifications
made by that contributor with its contributor version (or portions of such combination).
(c) the licenses granted in sections 2.2(a) and 2.2(b)
are effective on the date contributor first makes
commercial use of the covered code.
(d) Notwithstanding section 2.2(b) above, no patent
license is granted: 1) for any code that contributor
has deleted from the contributor version; 2)
separate from the contributor version; 3) for
infringements caused by: i) third party modifications of contributor version or ii) the combination
of modifications made by that contributor with
other software (except as part of the contributor
version) or other devices; or 4) under patent
claims infringed by covered code in the absence
of modifications made by that contributor.
3. Distribution Obligations.
3.1.
Application of license.
The modifications which You create or to which you
contribute are governed by the terms of this license,
including without limitation section 2.2. The source
code version of covered code may be distributed
only under the terms of this license or a future version of this license released under section 6.1, and
you must include a copy of this license with every
copy of the source code you distribute. You may not
offer or impose any terms on any source code version that alters or restricts the applicable version of
this license or the recipients' rights hereunder.
However, you may include an additional document
offering the additional rights described in section
3.5.
3.2. Availability of source code.
Any modification which you create or to which you
contribute must be made available in source code
form under the terms of this license either on the
same media as an executable version or via an
accepted electronic distribution mechanism to anyone to whom you made an executable version available; and if made available via electronic distribution
mechanism, must remain available for at least twelve
(12) months after the date it initially became available, or at least six (6) months after a subsequent
version of that particular modification has been
made available to such recipients. You are responsible for ensuring that the source code version remains
available even if the electronic distribution mechanism is maintained by a third party.
3.3. Description of modifications.
You must cause all covered code to which you contribute to contain a file documenting the changes You
made to create that covered code and the date of any
change. You must include a prominent statement that
the modification is derived, directly or indirectly, from
original code provided by the initial developer and
including the name of the initial developer in (a) the
source code, and (b) in any notice in an executable
version or related documentation in which you describe
the origin or ownership of the covered code.
3.4.
Intellectual property matters
(a) Third party claims.
If contributor has knowledge that a license under a
third party's intellectual property rights is required to
exercise the rights granted by such contributor under
sections 2.1 or 2.2, contributor must include a text file
with the source code distribution titled "LEGAL"
which describes the claim and the party making the
claim in sufficient detail that a recipient will know
whom to contact. If contributor obtains such knowledge after the modification is made available as
described in section 3.2, contributor shall promptly
modify the LEGAL file in all copies contributor makes
available thereafter and shall take other steps (such
as notifying appropriate mailing lists or newsgroups)
reasonably calculated to inform those who received
the covered code that new knowledge has been
obtained.
(b) Contributor APIs.
If contributor's modifications include an application
programming interface and contributor has knowledge of patent licenses which are reasonably necessary to implement that API, contributor must also
include this information in the LEGAL file.
(c) Representations.
contributor represents that, except as disclosed pursuant to section 3.4(a) above, contributor believes that
contributor's modifications are contributor's original
creation(s) and/or contributor has sufficient rights to
grant the rights conveyed by this license.
3.5. Required notices.
You must duplicate the notice in exhibit A in each file
of the source code. If it is not possible to put such
notice in a particular source code file due to its structure, then You must include such notice in a location
(such as a relevant directory) where a user would be
likely to look for such a notice. If You created one or
more modification(s), you may add your name as a
contributor to the notice described in exhibit A. you
must also duplicate this license in any documentation for the source code where You describe recipients' rights or ownership rights relating to covered
code. You may choose to offer, and to charge a fee
for, warranty, support, indemnity or liability obligations to one or more recipients of covered code.
However, you may do so only on your own behalf, and
not on behalf of the Initial developer or any contributor. You must make it absolutely clear than any such
warranty, support, indemnity or liability obligation is
offered by you alone, and You hereby agree to
indemnify the Initial developer and every contributor
for any liability incurred by the Initial developer or
such contributor as a result of warranty, support,
indemnity or liability terms you offer.
3.7.
4. Inability to comply due to statute or regulation.
If it is impossible for you to comply with any of the
terms of this license with respect to some or all of
the covered code due to statute, judicial order, or
regulation then you must: (a) comply with the terms
of this license to the maximum extent possible; and
(b) describe the limitations and the code they affect.
Such description must be included in the LEGAL file
described in section 3.4 and must be included with
all distributions of the source code. Except to the
extent prohibited by statute or regulation, such
description must be sufficiently detailed for a recipient of ordinary skill to be able to understand it.
5. Application of this license.
This license applies to code to which the initial developer has attached the notice in exhibit A and to
related covered code.
6. Versions of the license.
6.1.
New versions.
Netscape communications corporation (“Netscape”)
may publish revised and/or new versions of the
license from time to time. Each version will be given
a distinguishing version number.
6.2. Effect of new versions.
Once covered code has been published under a
particular version of the license, you may always continue to use it under the terms of that version. You
may also choose to use such covered code under
the terms of any subsequent version of the license
published by netscape. No one other than netscape
has the right to modify the terms applicable to covered code created under this license.
6.3. Derivative works.
If You create or use a modified version of this license
(which you may only do in order to apply it to code
which is not already covered code governed by this
license), You must (a) rename Your license so that the
phrases "Mozilla", "MOZILLAPL", "MOZPL",
"Netscape", "MPL", "NPL" or any confusingly similar
phrase do not appear in your license (except to note
that your license differs from this license) and (b)
otherwise make it clear that Your version of the
license contains terms which differ from the Mozilla
Public license and netscape Public License. (Filling in
the name of the initial developer, original code or
contributor in the notice described in exhibit A shall
not of themselves be deemed to be modifications of
this license.)
APPENDIX
3.6. Distribution of executable versions.
You may distribute covered code in executable form
only if the requirements of section 3.1-3.5 have been
met for that covered code, and if you include a notice
stating that the source code version of the covered
code is available under the terms of this license,
including a description of how and where you have
fulfilled the obligations of section 3.2. The notice
must be conspicuously included in any notice in an
executable version, related documentation or collateral in which you describe recipients' rights relating
to the covered code. You may distribute the executable version of covered code or ownership rights
under a license of your choice, which may contain
terms different from this license, provided that you
are in compliance with the terms of this license and
that the license for the executable version does not
attempt to limit or alter the recipient's rights in the
source code version from the rights set forth in this
license. If you distribute the executable version under
a different license you must make it absolutely clear
that any terms which differ from this license are
offered by you alone, not by the Initial developer or
any contributor. You hereby agree to indemnify the
initial developer and every contributor for any liability
incurred by the initial developer or such contributor
as a result of any such terms You offer.
code with other code not governed by the terms of
this license and distribute the larger work as a single
product. In such a case, you must make sure the
requirements of this license are fulfilled for the covered code.
Larger works.
You may create a larger work by combining covered
201
APPENDIX
7. DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY.
COVERED CODE IS PROVIDED UNDER THIS
LICENSE ON AN “AS IS” BASIS, WITHOUT
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED
OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION,
WARRANTIES THAT THE COVERED CODE IS FREE
OF DEFECTS, MERCHANTABLE, FIT FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NON-INFRINGING.
THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND
PERFORMANCE OF THE COVERED CODE IS WITH
YOU. SHOULD ANY COVERED CODE PROVE
DEFECTIVE IN ANY RESPECT, YOU (NOT THE
INITIAL
DEVELOPER
OR
ANY
OTHER
CONTRIBUTOR) ASSUME THE COST OF ANY
NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
THIS DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY CONSTITUTES
AN ESSENTIAL PART OF THIS LICENSE. NO USE
OF ANY COVERED CODE IS AUTHORIZED
HEREUNDER EXCEPT UNDER THIS DISCLAIMER.
8. TERMINATION.
8.1.
This license and the rights granted hereunder will
terminate automatically if you fail to comply with
terms herein and fail to cure such breach within 30
days of becoming aware of the breach. All sublicenses to the covered code which are properly
granted shall survive any termination of this license.
Provisions which, by their nature, must remain in
effect beyond the termination of this license shall
survive.
8.2. If you initiate litigation by asserting a patent infringement claim (excluding declatory judgment actions)
against initial developer or a contributor (the initial
developer or contributor against whom you file such
action is referred to as “Participant”) alleging that:
APPENDIX
202
(a) such participant's contributor version directly or
indirectly infringes any patent, then any and all
rights granted by such participant to you under
sections 2.1 and/or 2.2 of this license shall, upon
60 days notice from Participant terminate prospectively, unless if within 60 days after receipt of
notice you either: (i) agree in writing to pay participant a mutually agreeable reasonable royalty for
your past and future use of modifications made
by such participant, or (ii) withdraw your litigation
claim with respect to the contributor version
against such participant. If within 60 days of notice,
a reasonable royalty and payment arrangement
are not mutually agreed upon in writing by the
parties or the litigation claim is not withdrawn, the
rights granted by participant to you under sections 2.1 and/or 2.2 automatically terminate at the
expiration of the 60 day notice period specified
above.
(b) any software, hardware, or device, other than such
participant's contributor Version, directly or indirectly infringes any patent, then any rights grant-
ed to You by such participant under sections
2.1(b) and 2.2(b) are revoked effective as of the
date you first made, used, sold, distributed, or
had made, modifications made by that participant.
8.3. If you assert a patent infringement claim against
participant alleging that such participant's contributor version directly or indirectly infringes any patent
where such claim is resolved (such as by license or
settlement) prior to the initiation of patent infringement litigation, then the reasonable value of the
licenses granted by such participant under sections
2.1 or 2.2 shall be taken into account in determining
the amount or value of any payment or license.
8.4. In the event of termination under sections 8.1 or 8.2
above, all end user license agreements (excluding distributors and resellers) which have been validly
granted by you or any distributor hereunder prior to
termination shall survive termination.
9. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY.
UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES AND UNDER NO
LEGAL THEORY, WHETHER TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE), CONTRACT, OR OTHERWISE,
SHALL YOU, THE INITIAL DEVELOPER, ANY OTHER
CONTRIBUTOR, OR ANY DISTRIBUTOR OF
COVERED CODE,OR ANY SUPPLIER OF ANY OF
SUCH PARTIES, BE LIABLE TO ANY PERSON FOR
ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY CHARACTER
INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES
FOR LOSS OF GOODWILL, WORK STOPPAGE,
COMPUTER FAILURE OR MALFUNCTION, OR ANY
AND ALL OTHER COMMERCIAL DAMAGES OR
LOSSES, EVEN IF SUCH PARTY SHALL HAVE BEEN
INFORMED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGES. THIS LIMITATION OF LIABILITY SHALL
NOT APPLY TO LIABILITY FOR DEATH OR
PERSONAL INJURY RESULTING FROM SUCH
PARTY'S NEGLIGENCE TO THE EXTENT
APPLICABLE LAW PROHIBITS SUCH LIMITATION.
SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE
EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THIS EXCLUSION
AND LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
10. U.S. GOVERNMENT END USERS.
The covered code is a "commercial item," as that
term is defined in 48 C.F.R. 2.101 (Oct. 1995), consisting of "commercial computer software" and "commercial computer software documentation," as such
terms are used in 48 C.F.R. 12.212 (Sept. 1995).
Consistent with 48 C.F.R. 12.212 and 48 C.F.R.
227.7202-1 through 227.7202-4 (June 1995), all
U.S. Government end users acquire covered code
with only those rights set forth herein.
11. MISCELLANEOUS.
This license represents the complete agreement concerning subject matter hereof. If any provision of this
license is held to be unenforceable, such provision
shall be reformed only to the extent necessary to
make it enforceable. This License shall be governed
by California law provisions (except to the extent
applicable law, if any, provides otherwise), excluding
its conflict-of-law provisions. With respect to disputes in which at least one party is a citizen of, or an
entity chartered or registered to do business in the
united states of america, any litigation relating to this
License shall be subject to the jurisdiction of the
federal courts of the northern district of california,
with venue lying in santa clara county, california, with
the losing party responsible for costs, including without limitation, court costs and reasonable attorneys'
fees and expenses. The application of the united
nations convention on contracts for the International
sale of goods is expressly excluded. Any law or regulation which provides that the language of a contract
shall be construed against the drafter shall not apply
to this license.
12. RESPONSIBILITY FOR CLAIMS.
As between initial developer and the contributors,
each party is responsible for claims and damages
arising, directly or indirectly, out of its utilization of
rights under this license and you agree to work with
initial developer and contributors to distribute such
responsibility on an equitable basis. Nothing herein is
intended or shall be deemed to constitute any
admission of liability.
The contents of this file are subject to the Mozilla Public
License Version 1.1 (the “license”); you may not use this file
except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a
copy of the license at http://www.mozilla.org/MPL/
Software distributed under the license is distributed on an
"AS IS" basis, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, either
express or implied. See the license for the specific language governing rights and limitations under the License.
The Original Code is ______________________________________
.
The Initial Developer of the Original Code
is___________________.
Portions created by ______________________ are Copyright
(C) _______________________. All Rights Reserved.
Contributor(s): ______________________________________.
Alternatively, the contents of this file may be used under
the terms of the _____ license (the "[___] License"), in
which case the provisions of [______] license are applicable
instead of those above. If you wish to allow use of your
version of this file only under the terms of the [____] license
and not to allow others to use your version of this file under
the MPL, indicate your decision by deleting the provisions
above and replace them with the notice and other provisions required by the [___] license. If you do not delete the
provisions above, a recipient may use your version of this file
under either the MPL or the [___] license."
NOTE: The text of this exhibit A may differ slightly from the
text of the notices in the source code files of the original
code. You should use the text of this exhibit A rather than
the text found in the original code/source code for Your
modifications.
APPENDIX
13. MULTIPLE-LICENSED CODE.
Initial developer may designate portions of the covered code as "Multiple-Licensed". "MultipleLicensed" means that the initial developer permits
you to utilize portions of the covered code under your
choice of the NPL or the alternative licenses, if any,
specified by the initial developer in the file described
in exhibit A.
EXHIBIT A -Mozilla Public License.
203
The model and serial number of the TV is located
on the back and/or one side of the TV.
Record it below should you ever need service.
MODEL
SERIAL